Menu

Revelation 12:1 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

BSAAndkai a signsēmeion [wonder, supernatural indication] greatmegas [magnificent, extraordinary] appearedhoraō inen <the>ho heaven:ouranos [the sky, the spiritual realm] a womangunē [a female figure] having been clothed withperiballō [arrayed, dressed] theho sun,hēlios [the light of God's presence] andkai theho moonselēnē underhupokatō theho feetpous [in subjection to her authority] of herautos andkai onepi theho headkephalē [the seat of authority, the source of wisdom] of herautos a crownstephanos [a wreath, a symbol of honor] of starsastēr [heavenly bodies, messengers of God] twelve,dōdeka

Word
Listen & take awayRevelation 12
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 1 opens the chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (dōdeka) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Revelation 12:1quick helps
In a sentenceA significant sign appears in heaven, depicting a woman adorned with celestial elements.
Who is speakingJohn, the author of Revelation, reveals a vision.
Where we areIn the apocalyptic vision of Revelation, where signs symbolize deeper spiritual truths.
The hard wordσημεῖον
Take awayThe imagery conveys profound spiritual realities through symbolic representation.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectσημεῖον verbὀπτάνομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 26 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Revelation 12:1

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Woman and the Dragongenerated

1And a great sign appeared in heaven: a woman clothed in the sun, with the moon under her feet and a crown of twelve stars on her head.
2She was pregnant and crying out in the pain and agony of giving birth.
3Then another sign appeared in heaven: a huge red dragon with seven heads, ten horns, and seven royal crowns on his heads.
4His tail swept a third of the stars from the sky, tossing them to the earth. And the dragon stood before the woman who was about to give birth, ready to devour her child as soon as she gave birth.

Revelation 12:1 introduces a striking vision of a woman adorned in heavenly attire, representing significant spiritual truths. This vision unfolds in the context of cosmic conflict, where the woman symbolizes the people of God, and the dragon represents opposition. The surrounding verses elaborate on the struggle between good and evil, highlighting the woman's role in the narrative of redemption and the fulfillment of God's promises.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Revelation 12:3Then another sign appeared in heaven: a huge red dragon with seven heads, ten horns, and seven royal crowns on his heads.
2Revelation 11:19Then the temple of God in heaven was opened, and the ark of His covenant appeared in His temple. And there were flashes of lightning, and rumblings, and peals of thunder, and an earthquake, and a great hailstorm.
3Revelation 15:1Then I saw another great and marvelous sign in heaven: seven angels with the seven final plagues, with which the wrath of God is completed.
42 Chronicles 32:31And so when ambassadors of the rulers of Babylon were sent to him to inquire about the wonder that had happened in the land, God left him alone to test him, that He might know all that was in Hezekiah’s heart.
5Mark 13:25the stars will fall from the sky, and the powers of the heavens will be shaken.’

The Key Word σημεῖον, sēmeiongenerated

The term σημεῖον (*sēmeion*) is a neuter noun meaning 'sign' or 'wonder.' It encompasses indications or tokens, often with supernatural implications, as seen in the context of divine authority. This word is frequently used in the New Testament to denote miraculous events that point to God's actions, such as in Matthew 12:38 and Revelation 12:3.

In this verse, it signifies a remarkable sign in heaven, emphasizing its importance in the unfolding narrative of Revelation. The use of σημεῖον here suggests that the vision carries deeper meanings beyond the immediate visual representation.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as sign, which aligns with the KJV and other versions like the ASV and WEB. These translations maintain the concept of a divine indication.

However, the KJV uses wonder instead of sign, reflecting a different nuance. The translations generally agree on the core meaning but differ in the specific terminology used to convey the nature of the sign.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ὤφθη, which governs the entire clause. It indicates that a significant event took place, with the subject being the woman described in detail. The structure includes a noun phrase identifying the subject, followed by several prepositional phrases that elaborate on her appearance and attributes.

The phrase γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη serves as the subject, indicating the woman who is clothed, while the other elements provide context about her adornments and the setting of the vision.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

σημεῖον appears in the Septuagint as a translation of the Hebrew word אוֹת (H226), which also means 'sign.' This connection highlights the continuity of the concept of divine signs throughout scripture.

The imagery of celestial bodies, such as the sun and moon, resonates with various Old Testament themes, where heavenly phenomena often symbolize God's presence and authority.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Revelation 12:1 describes a vision of a woman clothed in the sun, standing on the moon, with a crown of twelve stars. This imagery symbolizes significant spiritual truths about God's people and their struggles against evil, as portrayed in the broader context of the chapter.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the woman symbolize in this vision?

The woman represents the people of God, often interpreted as the Church or Israel, adorned with divine glory and authority.

What is the significance of the crown of twelve stars?

The crown of twelve stars symbolizes the twelve tribes of Israel or the twelve apostles, indicating completeness and divine authority.

How does this vision relate to the overall theme of Revelation?

This vision highlights the cosmic struggle between good and evil, illustrating God's ultimate victory and the protection of His people.

What role do signs play in the Book of Revelation?

Signs in Revelation serve as divine indicators of God's plans and purposes, revealing spiritual truths and the unfolding of prophetic events.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What might the woman represent in your own spiritual journey?
  2. How can understanding the symbolism in this verse deepen your faith?
  3. In what ways do you see signs of God's presence in your life?
  4. How can you apply the themes of struggle and victory depicted in this vision to your own challenges?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

The early Church Fathers provide insights into the interpretation of this vision, particularly regarding the identity of the woman and her significance in the context of the Church.

Hippolytus of RomeHippolytus Dogmatical and Historical Fragments c. 170–235
By the woman then clothed with the sun," he meant most manifestly the Church, endued with the Father's word, whose brightness is above the sun.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 12 →
Hippolytus of RomeHippolytus Dogmatical and Historical Fragments c. 170–235
Now, concerning the tribulation of the persecution which is to fall upon the Church from the adversary, John also speaks thus: "And I saw a great and wondrous sign in heaven;
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 12 →
Victorinus of PettauCommentary on the Apocalypse of the Blessed John d. c. 304
"And there was seen a great sign in heaven. A woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and on her head a crown of twelve stars.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 12 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Revelation 12:1 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And there appeared a great wonder in heaven,.... This vision begins a new account of things, and represents the church in the apostles' times, and purer ages of Christianity, and under the Heathen

Read John Gill on Revelation 12 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars: This episode (Revelation 12:1-17; Revelation

Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 12 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

CHAPTER 12 ,2 A woman clothed with the sun travaileth, ,4 A great red dragon standeth ready to devottr her child, ,6 She is delivered, and fleeth into the wilderness, Michael and his angels fight with the dragon, who is cast out of heaven with his angels. The victory proclaimed in heaven. The dragon, cast down to the earth, persecuteth the woman. And there appeared a great wonder in heaven: I see no reason to doubt, but that John was all this while in heaven, whither he was taken up, , where he saw in a vision a great wonder, or a most remarkable thing. A woman clothed with the sun; I find all valuable interpreters agreeing, that this woman represented the church, well enough compared to a…

Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 12 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

1 And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars: Ver. 1. And there appeared] This and the two next following chapters are an exposition of the former vision. A great wonder] As shadowing out and showing great wonders. In heaven] That is, in the Church, or (according to some) in the visible heaven, where sun, moon, and stars are. A woman] Alma mater Ecclesia. The Church is called a woman, for her, 1. Weakness; 2. Fruitfulness; 3. Lovingness, 2 Samuel 1:26. Clothed with the sun] With Christ’ s own comeliness, Ezekiel 16:14. She is also conspicuous, Matthew 5:14, and scorched with persecution…

Read John Trapp on Revelation 12 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(1) And there appeared . . .—Better, And a great sign was seen in the heaven. The word sign is preferable to “wonder,” both in this verse and in Revelation 12:3. It is the same word which is rendered sign in Revelation 15:1. It is a sign which is seen: not a mere wonder, but something which has a meaning; it is not “a surprise ending with itself,” but a signal to arrest attention, and possessing significance; there is “an idea concealed behind it.” (Comp. Note on John 2:11.) A woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars.—All the lights of heaven are brought together here for a description which cannot fail to remind us of the picture of…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 12 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

CHAPTER XII. The woman clothed with the sun, and in travail, 1, 2. The great red dragon waiting to devour the child as soon as born, 3, 4. The woman is delivered of a son, who is caught up unto God; and she flees to the wilderness, 5, 6. The war in heaven between Michael and the dragon, 7, 8. The dragon and his angels are overcome and cast down to the earth; whereupon the whole heavenly host give glory to God, 9-11. The dragon, full of wrath at his defeat, persecutes the woman, 12, 13. She flees to the wilderness, whither he attempts to pursue her; and he makes war with her seed, 14-17. NOTES ON CHAP. XII. Before I introduce the comment mentioned at the close of the preceding chapter, I…

Read AdamClarke on Revelation 12 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

The Woman with the Man-Child. Chap. 12 Rev 12:1-61. a great wonder] Should be sign, as in the margin, both here and in Revelation 12:3.a woman] Who is this? The two answers most commonly given are (1) the Virgin Mary, (2) the Church. Neither seems quite satisfactory. There can indeed be little doubt that the Son born of this woman is the Son of Mary: nor ought theological or ecclesiastical considerations to exclude the view that Mary is herself intended by the mother; the glory ascribed to her is no greater than that of a glorified saint (Daniel 12:3; St Matthew 13:43), and St John was not bound to suppress a truth for fear of the false inference Pius V. or Pius IX. might seek to draw from…

Read Cambridge on Revelation 12 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And there appeared a great wonder in heaven - In that heavenly world thus disclosed, in the very presence of God, he saw the impressive and remarkable symbol which he proceeds to describe.

Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 12 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

And a great sign appeared in heaven: a woman clothed in the sun, with the moon under her feet and a crown of twelve stars on her head.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

A great sign was seen in heaven: a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and on her head a crown of twelve stars.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

And a great sign appeared in heaven: a woman clothed in the sun, with the moon under her feet and a crown of twelve stars on her head.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Then a great sign appeared in heaven: a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet, and on her head was a crown of twelve stars.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And a great sign was seen in heaven: a woman arrayed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars;

RVARevised Version, American1894

And a great sign was seen in heaven; a woman arrayed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars;

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And there appeared a great wonder in heaven; a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars:

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And there appeared a great wonder in heauen: A woman clothed with the sunne, and the moone was vnder her feete, and vpon her head a crowne of twelue starres.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And a great sign was seen in the heaven: a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars;

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And a great sign was seen in the heaven, a woman arrayed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And a great sign was seen in the sky: a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and on her head a garland of twelve stars,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

A great sign was seen in heaven: a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet, and a crown of twelve stars was on her head.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And a great sign appeared in heaven: A woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her feet, and on her head a crown of twelve stars:

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Then an amazing sign appeared in heaven: a woman clothed with the sun, with the moon under her feet, and a crown of twelve stars on her head.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And a great sign was seen in heaven: a A woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet, and on her head a crown of twelve stars.

Word by word, the decisions they made

σημεῖονsēmeion a sign G4592 2 different renderings
signASV BBE BSB DBY DRA FBV LSV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB YLT
wonderGNV KJV NWB
ὤφθηhoraō appeared G3700 2 different renderings
appearedBSB DRA FBV MSB NETB
there appearedGNV KJV NWB
οὐρανῷ,ouranos heaven: G3772 2 different renderings
heavenASV BBE BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
the skyLSV
περιβεβλημένηperiballō having been clothed with G4016 2 different renderings
arrayedASV RVA YLT
clothed inBSB MSB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseΚαὶAndclausenoun phrase · subjectσημεῖονa signμέγαgreatverbὤφθηappearedprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinnoun phraseτῷ-οὐρανῷheavenclauseclauseclauseclausesubjectγυνὴa womanverbπεριβεβλημένηclothed withnoun phrase · objectτὸνtheἥλιονsunκαὶandclausenoun phrase · subjecttheσελήνηmoonprepositional phrase · predicateὑποκάτωundernoun phraseτῶνthenoun phraseποδῶνfeetαὐτῆςof herκαὶandclauseprepositional phrase · predicateἐπὶonnoun phraseτῆςthenoun phraseκεφαλῆςheadαὐτῆςof hernoun phrase · subjectστέφανοςa crownnoun phraseἀστέρωνof starsδώδεκαtwelveκαὶandclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνinγαστρὶwombverbἔχουσαhavingκαὶAndclauseverbκράζειshe cries outclause · adverbialclauseverbὠδίνουσαbeing in travailκαὶandclauseverbβασανιζομένηbeing in painadverbialτεκεῖνto bring forth

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et signum magnum apparuit in cælo : mulier amicta sole, et luna sub pedibus ejus, et in capite ejus corona stellarum duodecim :

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܐܬܐ ܪܒܬܐ ܐܬܚܙܝܬ ܒܫܡܝܐ ܐܢܬܬܐ ܕܥܛܝܦܐ ܫܡܫܐ ܘܣܗܪܐ ܬܚܝܬ ܪܓܠܝܗ ܘܟܠܝܠܐ ܕܟܘܟܒܐ ܬܪܥܣܪ ܥܠ ܪܫܗ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Καὶ σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῆς στέφανος ἀστέρων δώδεκα,

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Revelation 12:1καίAndAndκαίσημεῖονa signa signσημεῖονμέγαςgreatgreatμέγαςὀπτάνομαιappearedappearedὀπτάνομαιἐνininἐν<the><the>οὐρανόςheaven:heaven:οὐρανόςγυνήa womana womanγυνήπεριβάλλωhaving beenhaving been cloπεριβάλλωthetheἥλιοςsun,sun,ἥλιοςκαίandandκαίthetheσελήνηmoonmoonσελήνηὑποκάτωunderunderὑποκάτωthetheπούςfeetfeetπούςαὐτόςof herof herαὐτόςκαίandandκαίἐπίononἐπίthetheκεφαλήheadheadκεφαλήαὐτόςof herof herαὐτόςστέφανοςa crowna crownστέφανοςἀστήρof starsof starsἀστήρδώδεκαtwelve,twelve,δώδεκαπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίαἱρέωv. I choosv. I choose, prαἱρέωὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦδύοAdj. & IndAdj. & Indec.nuδύοσημαίνωv. I signiv. I signify, iσημαίνωβλέπωv. I look,v. I look, seeβλέπωοἶδαv. I know,v. I know, remeοἶδαεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκὄροςn.n. a moun.n. a mountainὄροςγίνομαιv. I come v. I come into γίνομαιδιάδημαn.n. a hean.n. a head-wreδιάδημαστρωννύωv. I spreav. I spread, maστρωννύωἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωτέραςn.n. a wonn.n. a wonder, τέραςσεισμόςn.m. an ean.m. an earthquσεισμός
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 12:1

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
Καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
σημεῖονsēmeion a sign G4592 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
77× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A sign is an indication or token of something, often supernatural. In the Bible, it's used in Matthew 26:48 and Luke 2:12 to describe miracles or events that point to God.
Amplified meaning
wonder, supernatural indication
Tyndale gloss
sign
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σημεῖον (i.e., *semeion*) is a neuter noun meaning a sign, mark, or token. It encompasses various uses, including distinguishing features, omens, and miraculous signs, particularly in the context of divine authority. The New Testament frequently employs it to refer to miracles and wonders (e.g., Mt 12:38, 24:30). Notably, some lexicons suggest differing nuances regarding its use in relation to signs of divine intervention versus ordinary indications.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — τέρας, σημεῖον, δύναμις, μεγαλεῖον, ἔνδοξον, παράδοξον, θαυμάσιον from a scan

παράδοξον, θαυμάσιον. THESE words have this in common, that they are all used to characterize the supernatural works wrought by Christ in the days of his flesh; thus σημεῖον, John ii. 11; Acts ii. 19; τέρας, Acts ii. 22; John iv. 48; δύναμις, Mark vi. 2 ; Acts ii. 22; μεγαλεῖον, Luke i. 49; ἔνδοξον, Luke xiii. 17; παράδοξον, Luke v. 26; θαυμάσιον, Matt. xxi. 15 ; while the first three and the most usual are in like manner employed of the same supernatural works wrought in the power of Christ by his Apostles (2 Cor. xii. 12); and of the lying miracles of Antichrist no less (2 Thess. ii. 9). They will be found, on closer examination, not so much to represent different kinds of miracles, as miracles contemplated under different aspects and from different points of view. Tépas and σημεῖον are often linked together in the N. T. (John iv. 48; Acts ii. 22; iv. 30; 2 Cor. xii. 12); and times…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σημεῖον, -ου, τό

[in LXX chiefly for אוֹת ;]

a sign, mark, token;

of that which distinguishes a person or thing from others: Mt 26:48, Lk 2:12, II Th 3:17 (cf. Deiss., LAE, 1532); seq. gen. epexeg., Ro 4:11; c. gen. obj., Mt 24:8, 30, II Co 12:12; c. gen. subj., Mt 16:3;

a sign of warning or admonition: Mt 12:39 16:4, Lk 2:34 11:29, 30, I Co…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σημεῖον, -ov, τό, (σημαίνω [or σῆμα), ir. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, Hebr. nix, @ sign, mark, token; aM uniy. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished from others and known: Mt. xxvi. 48; Lk. ii.12; 2 Th. iii. 17; σημεῖον περιτομῆς (explanatory gen. [ef. B. § 123, 4]), equiv. to σημεῖον, 6 ἐστι περιτομή, circumcision which should be a sign of the covenant formed with God, Ro. iv. 11; τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου, the tokens by which one is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12; a sign by which anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4; Lk. xxi. 73 TO σημ. τῆς σῆς παρουσίας, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv. 35 Tov υἱοῦ Tov ἀνθρώπου, the sign which indicates that the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the subj. τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν, i.e. the indications of future events which of καιροί furnish, what of καιροί portend…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σημεῖον (ii/B.c.) (= Witkowski®, p. 111) περὶ μὲν [ο]Ἱῦν τῶν ἄλλων [οὔ σοι γέγραφα, Μ΄. . .o]s γάρ σοι σημα[ν]εῖ ἕκαστα, 20. IV. 12069 (B.c. 28) οὔπωι σεσήμαγκε τί ἐκβέβη[κ]ε, and τὸ. 10784 (A.D. 39) (= Chest. L. p. 83) οὐ καλῶς δὲ ἐπόησας ἐκπορευομένων πολλῶν φίλων μὴ σημᾶναί por μηδὲ ἕν. For the two forms σημᾶναι and σημῆναι, see Mayser Gr. i. p- 360, Psaltes Gr. p. 223. The pass. is seen in such passages as P Rein 71" (B.C. 141?) ἐν τῶν σημανθέντι χρόνωι, ‘ within the stipulated time,’ P Amh II. 318 (8.6. 112) σημανθέντος, ‘it having been reported,” P Oxy 11. 2831 (A.D. 45) τὸν σημαινόμένον δοῦλον, ‘the above-mentioned slave,” P Tebt II. 2782 (nursery acrostic—early i/A.D.) onpe(= at)veral μοι, τηρῖ ple] γάρ, “he is indicated to me, for he watches me (Ὁ) ᾿᾿ (Edd.), P Oxy I. 768 (A.D. 179) ὃ σημαινόμενός μου πατήρ, ‘‘my above-mentioned father,’’ 74. 79* (notice of death—A.p. 181-192)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σημεῖον (sēmeion) — sign.

σημεῖον, τό,

Ionic dialect σημήϊον, Doric dialect σᾱμήϊον [Refs 4th c.BC+], σᾱμεῖον [Refs 2nd c.BC+], σᾱμᾶον [Refs] —= σῆμα in all senses, and more common in Prose, but never in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: mark by which a thing is known, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sign of the future, τυραννίδος σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; trace, track, σημεῖα δ᾽ οὔτε θηρὸς οὔτε του κυνῶν.. ἐξεφαίνετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a cork on a buoy, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

__b Doric dialect, tomb, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. sign from the gods, omen, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; wonder, portent, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; especially of the constellations, regarded as signs, δύεται σημεῖα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σημεῖον

semeion

neuter of a presumed derivative of the base of 4591; an indication,

especially ceremonially or supernaturally:--miracle, sign, token,

wonder.

see GREEK for 4591

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σημεῖον, ου, τό

n.n.

a sign, miracle, indication

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σημεῖον sēmeion 77x

a sign, a mark, token, by which anything is known or distinguished, Mt. 16:3; 24:3; 2 Thess. 3:17; a token, pledge, assurance, Lk. 2:12; a proof, evidence, convincing token, Mt. 12:38; 16:1; Jn. 2:18; in NT a sign, wonder, remarkable event, wonderful appearance, extraordinary phenomenon, 1 Cor. 14:22; Rev. 12:1, 3; 15:1; a portent, prodigy, Mt. 24:30; Acts 2:19; a wonderful…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σημεῖον σημεῖον, ου, τό, σῆμα a sign, a mark, token, Hdt., attic

a sign from the gods, an omen, Soph., Plat.: esp. of the constellations, Eur.

a sign or signal to do a thing made by flags, Hdt.; αἴρειν, κατασπᾶν τὸ ς. to make or take down the signal for battle, Thuc.; τὰ σημεῖα ἤρθη the signals agreed upon were made, id. Thuc.

an ensign or flag, on the admiral's ship, Hdt.; on the general's tent, Xen.:—then, generally, a standard, ensign, Eur.: hence, a boundary, limit, Dem.

a device upon a shield, Hdt., Eur.; upon ships, a figure-head, Ar.

a signal, watchword, Thuc.

in reasoning, a sign or proof, Ar., Thuc., etc.:— σημεῖον δέ: or σημεῖον γάρ: (to introduce an argument) this is a proof of it, Dem., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sin ('oth "a sign" "mark" mopheth, "wonder"' semeion, "a sign," "signal," "mark"): A mark by which persons or things are distinguished and made known. In Scripture used generally of an address to the senses to attest the existence of supersensible and therefore divine power. Thus the plagues of Egypt were "signs" of divine displeasure against the Egyptians (Ex 4:8 ff; Jos 24:17, and often); and the miracles of Jesus were "signs" to attest His unique relationship with God (Mt 12:38; Joh 2:18; Ac 2:22). Naturally, therefore, both in the Old Testament and the New Testament, "signs" are assimilated to the miraculous, and…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A token, pledge, or proof, Ge 9:12,13 17:11 Ex 3:12 Isa 8:18. Also a supernatural portent, Lu 21:11; and a miracle, regarded as a token of the divine agency, Ex 4:7-9 Mr 8:11. The "signs of heaven" were the movements and aspects of the heavenly bodies, from which heathen astrologers pretended to obtain revelations, Isa 44:25 Jer 10:2. See SHIP.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ A miracle to confirm faith Mt 12:38; 16:4; 24:3,30; Mr 8:11,12; 13:4; Joh 2:11; 3:2; 4:48

→ Asked for by, and given to

Abraham Ge 15:8-17

Moses Ex 4:1-9

Gideon Jud 6:17,36-40

Hezekiah 2Ki 20:8

Zacharias Lu 1:18

→ Given to Jeroboam 1Ki 13:3-5

→ A token of coming events Mt 16:3,4; 24:3

→ See MIRACLES

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
49%signs
signs49% · 38×sign48% · 37×other renderings3% · 2×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object52%subject33%adverbial10%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 77 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
μήNegτίςIrgποιέωI do, make
καίand, even, also, nam
τέραςa wonder, portenἐπιζητέωI seek after, deζητέωI seek, search f
ποιέωI do, make
καίand, even, also,ὅςπολύςmuch, many, ofte
αὐτός
ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, qδίδωμιI offer, giveπαρά
σύ
ἀπόοὗτοςποιέωI do, make
σημεῖονa sign77×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
τέραςa wonder, portenδύναμιςmight, power, ma
ποιέωI do, make
ὅςArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ποιέωI do, makeδίδωμιI offer, giveἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, c
Article the
καιρόςfitting season, σόςυἱόςa son, descenden
μέγας
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσημεῖον · 77× in the New Testament
John Acts Matthew Luke Mark Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Romans Hebrews
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 72 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 49c. AD 40

κατὰ μὲν γὰρ τὸ ἓν τάττεται τὸ λεγόμενον ἐν γεωμετρίᾳ σημεῖον, κατὰ δὲ τὰ δύο γραμμή, διότι ῥύσει μὲν ἑνὸς δυάς, ῥύσει δὲ σημείου συνίσταται γραμμή·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.59c. AD 75–95

καὶ σημεῖον ἐπιβαλών, ᾧ γνώριμος ἂν εἴη, προσέταξεν ἀπιέναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.14c. AD 100

ἔτι δὲ κἀκεῖνο, ἀδελφοί μου, νοεῖτε: ὅταν βλέπετε μετὰ τηλικαῦτα σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γεγονότα ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ οὕτως ἐγκαταλελεῖφθαι αὐτούς: προσέχωμεν, μήποτε, ὡς γέγραπται, πολλοὶ κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοὶ εὑρεθῶμεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
O.Did. 361DidymoiAD 77

τῷ κομίζοντί σοι τοῦτο τὸ ὄστρακον, ἄχρι οὗ ἀνακάμψῃ ἀπὸ Βερενίκης καὶ ἀπολάβῃς αὐτόν. σημεῖον ὅτι ἥκεις καλῶν με καὶ τὸν γαμβρὸν καὶ λέγω σοι ὅτι ὀφθαλμιᾷ. μὴ οὖν

C.Clergé 1 31ArsinoitesAD 155–AD 156

Αἰλίου Ἁδριανοῦ Ἀντωνείνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς … . μετὰ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ἀγαθοκλῆς ἐπύθετο, εἴ τινα σημεῖα ἔχουσιν οἱ παῖδες … ἱερογραμματέως εἰπόντος … ξα μὲν οὐλὰς τοῦ δ … τὸν

C.Clergé 1 33ArsinoitesAD 155–AD 156

Αἰλίου Ἁδριανοῦ Ἀντωνείνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς … . μετὰ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ἀγαθοκλῆς ἐπύθετο, εἴ τινα σημεῖα ἔχουσιν οἱ παῖδες ἐπὶ τοῦ σώματος … δ … Ἀμούνιος ἱερογραμματέως εἰπόντος αὐτοὺς εἶναι

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
μέγαmegas great G3173 Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
243× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for great, describing something big or intense, like a large stone in Matthew 2:60 or a strong wind in John 6:18. It's used to show importance or magnitude. In the Bible, it's often used to describe God's power and love.
Amplified meaning
magnificent, extraordinary
Tyndale gloss
great
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μέγας is an adjective meaning 'great' or 'large,' used to describe size, intensity, or importance. It can refer to physical dimensions, such as a stone or city, or to abstract qualities like love or fear. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Matthew 2:10 and Revelation 11:8. The word has comparative and superlative forms: μείζων (greater) and μέγιστος (greatest).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα,

[in LXX chiefly for גָּדוֹל, also for רַב, מַרְבֶּה (incl. μείζων), רֹב (μέγιστος);]

great;

of external form, bodily size, measure, extent: λίθος, Mt 2:60; δράκων, Re 12:3; ἰχθῦς, Jo 21:11; πόλις, Re 11:8; μάχαιρα, Re 6:4, al.

Of intensity and degree: δύναμις, Ac 4:33; φόβος, Mk 4:41; ἀγάπη, Jo 15:13; ἄνεμος, Jo 6:18; κραυγή, Ac 23:9; φῶς, Mt 4:16; πυρετός,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [(τοϊαϊοα to Lat. magnus, ADEE Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον), etc.; Vaniéek p. 682; Cur tius ὃ 462)], ace. μέγαν. μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. pokes ται, -a; comp. μείζων, -ον, (acc. πιᾶξο. and fem. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pectorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the compar. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ὮΥΤΔ; also for 31; great; 1. predicated a. of the external form or sensible appearance of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, Rey. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3,9; ἀετός, ibid. 14; δένδρον…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέγας (B.C. 112) (= Selections, p. 30) μεγαλοίυϊπρεπέστερον ἐγδεχθήτωι, ‘let him be received with special magnificence ” (Edd.), PSI V. 4818 (v/vi a.p.) Tavptvyos ὃ μεγαλοπρεπέστί(ατος), and P Amh II. 154° (vi/vii A.D.) τοῦ peyadoπρε(πεστάτου) χαρτουλαρίου, ‘the most magnificent secretary.” For the subst. as a title of address cf. P Oxy VIII. 1163* (v/a.D.) ἐρωτηθὶς παρὰ τῆς αὐτοῦ μεγαλοπρεπίας ὅσα ἐχρῆν ἀνεδίδαξα αὐ τ]ὸν περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας μεγαλο| πρεπίας, ‘Son the inquiry of his magnificence I told him what was fitting about your magnificence,” 76. I. 155° (vi/A.D.) ἐπειδὴ αἱ προσκυνοῦσαι τὴν ὑμετέραν μεγαλοπρί(έπειαν) καὶ τὰ παιδία ἀρρωστοῦσιν, ὡς ἔθος ἔχει τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος χαρίζεσθαί μου τοῦ λογαρίου, ‘since your magnificence’s obedient servants and their children are ill, I hope your highness will excuse my account” (Edd.). | , μεγαλύνω. With the use of this verb in the pass. in Phil…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέγας (megas) — great.

μέγᾰς, μεγάλη [ᾰ], μέγα [ᾰ],

genitive μεγάλου, ης, ου, dative μεγάλῳ, ῃ, ῳ, accusative μέγᾰν, μεγάλην, μέγα [ᾰ]; dual μεγάλω, α, w; plural μεγάλοι, μεγάλαι, μεγάλα, etc.: the stem μεγάλο- is never used in singular nominative and accusative masculine and neuter, and only once in vocative masculine,

__A ὦ μεγάλε Ζεῦ [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.I big, of bodily size: frequently of stature, εἶδος.. μ. ἦν ὁράασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φῶτα μέγαν καὶ καλόν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φύσιν τίν᾽ εἶχε φράζ; Answ. μέγας [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.b full-grown, of age as shown by stature, νῦν δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ μ. εἰμί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, elder of two persons of the same name, Wilcken [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Σκιπίων ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέγας

megas

(including the prolonged forms, feminine megale, plural

megaloi, etc.; compare also 3176, 3187); big (literally or

figuratively, in a very wide application):--(+ fear) exceedingly,

great(-est), high, large, loud, mighty, + (be) sore (afraid), strong,

X to years.

see GREEK for 3176

see GREEK for 3187

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα

Adj. & Comp.adv.

large, great

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέγας megas 243x

great, large in size, Mt. 27:60; Mk. 4:32; great, much, numerous, Mk. 5:11; Heb. 11:26; great, grown up, adult, Heb. 11:24; great, vehement, intense, Mt. 2:10; 28:8; great, sumptuous, Lk. 5:29; great, important, weighty, of high importance, 1 Cor. 9:11; 13:13; great, splendid, magnificent, Rev. 15:3; extraordinary, wonderful, 2 Cor.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέγας Radic. sense, opp. to μικρός, σμικρός, big, great, of men's stature, tall, Hom.; of women, καλή τε μεγάλη τε Od.:—also, great, full-grown, of age as shewn by stature, id. Od., Aesch.

vast, high, οὐρανός, ὄρος, πύργος Hom.

vast, spacious, wide, πέλαγός, αἰγιαλός, etc., id. Hom.

of Degree, great, strong, mighty, of gods, id. Hom., etc.; μεγάλα θεά, of Demeter and Proserpine, Soph.; μέγας ηὐξήθη rose to greatness, Dem.; βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας, i. e. the King of Persia, le grand monarque, Hdt.; βασιλεὺς μέγας Aesch.; ὁ μ. ἐπικληθεὶς Ἀντίοχος the Great, Polyb.

great, strong, violent, etc., ἄνεμος, λαῖλαψ Hom.; of properties, passions, etc., id. Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSN — Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%great
great56% · 137×greater15% · 36×loud14% · 34×greatest3% · 7×other renderings9% · 21×other renderings4% · 11×

246 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject27%adverbial26%predicate24%object22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 243 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πόλιςa cityκαίand, even, also,ΒαβυλώνBabylon
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
κράζωI cry aloud, shrἐνφωνέωI crow, shout, s
καίand, even, also, nam
ποιέωI do, makeἀποθήκηa repository, grτέDisj
γάρfor
τίςIrgεἰμίI am, exist
φόβοςfear, terror, revere
φοβέωI fear, am terriγίνομαιI come into beinὅτιthat, since, bec
μέγαςgreat243×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakθαυμαστόςwonderful, marve
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἌρτεμιςthe Persian or EκάθημαιI sit, am seated
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theὧδεhereἐν
ἐν
Article theγεννητόςbegotten, bornσύ
ἐπί
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέγας · 243× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Acts Matthew John Mark Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 John James 1 Timothy 2 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 340 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 85Pathyris114 BC

καὶ θεοῦ Φιλοπάτορος Νέου καὶ θεοῦ Εὐεργέτου καὶ θεῶν Φιλομητόρων Σωτήρων, ἱεροῦ πώλου Ἴσιδος μεγάλης μητρὸς θεῶν, ἀθλοφόρου Βερενίκης Εὐεργέτιδος, κανηφόρου Ἀρσινόης Φιλαδέλφου, ἱερείας Ἀρσινόης Φιλοπάτορος τῶν ὄντων ἐν

μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης βιαιότερον ἐμβατεύσας εἰς τὸ δηλούμενον ἔδαφος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος καὶ εἰς τὰ συνκύροντα τούτωι ἐν

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ὤφθηhoraō appeared G3700 Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singular
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Meaning
To appear means to come into view or be seen, often unexpectedly. In Acts 1:3, Jesus appeared to his disciples after his resurrection, showing himself to them. It involves being visible or noticeable.
Tyndale gloss
to appear
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὀπτάνομαι (*optanomai*) means to appear or to be seen. It is a middle voice verb derived from the root related to seeing, indicating an active participation in the act of appearing. The New Testament uses this term in Acts 1:3, where it refers to someone allowing themselves to be seen. There is some discussion among lexicographers about its nuances compared to other Greek words for seeing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ὀπτάνω,

[in LXX: III Ki 8:8 (ראה ni.), To 12:19*;]

late present as from ὤφθην (= ὁράω); mid., ὀπτάνομαι, to allow oneself to be seen, to appear. c. dat., Ac 1:3. (For exx. from π., v. Deiss., LAE, 79, 2525; MM, ii, xviii.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὀπτάνω (OIITQ): to look at, behold; mid. pres. ptep. ὀπτανόμενος; to allow one’s self to be seen, to appear: tui, Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8; Tob. xii. 19; [Graec. Ven. Ex. χχχῖν. 24].)~ ὀπτασία. -as, ἡ, (ὀπτάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting one’s self to view: ὀπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [A. V. visions; cf. Meyer ad loc.] (ἐν ἡμέραις ὀπτασίας pov, Add. to Esth. iv. 1.44 (13); [οἷς Mal. iii. 2]; ἥλιος ἐν ὀπτασίᾳ, coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sight, a vision, an appearance presented to one whether asleep or awake: οὐράνιος ont. Acts xxvi. 19; ἑωρακέναι ὀπτασίαν, Lk. i. 22; w. gen. of appos. ἀγγέλων, Lk. xxiv. 23. A later form for ὄψις [ef. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for 7879, Dan. [Theodot.] ix. 23; x. 1, 7 sq.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὀπτάνομαι can be definitely removed from the list or so-called “Biblical” words (Grimm-Thayer, p. 695), since to its occurrences in the LXX (3 Kingdoms 88, Tob 1219: cf. P Oxy XIII. p. 4) and the NT (Ac 1°), we can add such early exx. as P Par 4038 (B.c. 164-158) (= Witkowski,” Ῥ- 72) εἰ δὲ δι᾽ ἄλλο τι οὐκ ὀπτάνεταί por, P Tebt I. 24° (B.C. 117) καὶ μηδαμῶς ὀπτανομένων ὑπ... Of a later date we have the great magical papyrus P Par 574903 (¢. A.D. 300) ὁρκίζω oe τὸν ὀπτανθέντα τῴ ᾿Ο(-- ᾿Τ)σραὴλ ἐν στύλῳ φωτινῷ καὶ νεφέλῃ ἡμερινῇ, an interesting reference to Exod 135} (see Deissmann ZAZ p. 252). On the implications involved in the use of ὀπτάνομαι in Ac 1° as denoting actual appearance as distinguished from vision cf. Knowling 567 ad /. ONTO. With the use of this verbal adj. in Lk 24% (cf. Hobart, p. 182f.) we may compare P Giss I. 93° ὀπτοῦ δέλφακος, ‘roast pork,”’ in what appears to be a…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὀπτάνομαι (optanomai) — to appear.

ὀπτάζομαι,

passive, to be seen, [LXX]:—so ὀπτάνομαι,[LXX+5th c.BC+]:—an active ὀπταίνω in [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὀπτάνομαι

optanomai

of the primary (middle voice)

optomai op'-tom-ahee; which is used for it in certain

tenses; and both as alternate of

3708

to gaze (i.e. with wide-open eyes, as at something remarkable; and

thus differing from 991, which denotes simply voluntary observation;

and from 1492, which expresses merely mechanical, passive or casual

vision; while 2300, and still more emphatically its intensive 2334,

signifies an earnest but more continued inspection; and 4648 a

watching from a distance):--appear, look, see, shew self.

see GREEK for 3708

see GREEK for 991

see GREEK for 1492

see GREEK for 2300

see GREEK for 2334

see GREEK for 4648

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὀπτάνομαι

v.

I appear, am seen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὀπτάνομαι optanomai 1x

to be seen, appear, Acts 1:3*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-API-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singular
aorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-API-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
22%you will behold
you will behold22% · 12×appeared17% · 9×will behold9% · 5×he appeared9% · 5×they will behold7% · 4×having appeared6% · 3×will they behold6% · 3×other renderings15% · 8×other renderings9% · 5×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceὀπτάνομαι · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 7 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
τῷho <the> G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
οὐρανῷ,ouranos heaven: G3772 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
273× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for heaven refers to the sky and God's home, symbolizing happiness and power. It's used in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 5:18 and Hebrews 1:10. This concept represents the universe and eternity.
Amplified meaning
the sky, the spiritual realm
Tyndale gloss
heaven
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

οὐρανός (ouranos) means heaven or sky, often referring to both the physical vault above and the spiritual realm where God and angels reside. It is used in various contexts, including the universe and divine authority, appearing frequently in the New Testament. Notably, some lexicons mention its use in a metaphorical sense, while others focus on its physical aspects.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐρανός, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁמַיִם (hence, often pl., οἱ οὐ., v. infr.);]

heaven;

of the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky and the aerial regions above the earth: opp. to ἡ γῆ, He 1:10, II Pe 3:5, 10; ὁ οὐ. καὶ ἡ γῆ, i.e. the world, the universe, Mt 5:18, Mk 13:31, Lk 10:21, Ac 4:24, Re 10:6, al.; ἀπ’ ἄκρων οὐ. ἕως ἄ. αὐτῶν (on the absence of art. aft. prep., v. Bl., § 46, 5), Mt 24:31; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐρανός, -ov, ὁ, [fr.a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘ encompass’; οἵ. Vanicek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and, in imitation of the Hebr. Οὐ (i.e. prop. the heights above, the upper regions), οὐρανοί, τῶν, οἱ, the heavens [W. § 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the art. ef. W. 121 (115)), i. 6. 1. the vaulted expanse of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. generally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 12; 6 ovp. x. ἡ γῆ, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv. 19; Tob. vii. 17 (18); 1 Mace. ii. 37, ete.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 81; Lk. x. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; Rev. x.6; xiv. 7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of the expanded sky as an arch or yault…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὐρανός. For οὐρανός in the wide sense of ‘‘sky,’’ ‘‘heaven,” as opposed to γῆ, “earth,” cf. P Leid G1 (p.c. 181-145) (=I. p. 42), a prayer to the gods that they would grant to Ptolemy Philometor and Berenice—kvprelay τῶν [ὑ]πὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χώρωϊν, ‘‘dominationem terrestrium regionum ” (Ed.), and the magic P Lond 1217 (iii/a.p.) (=I. p. 93) πρὶν γενέσθε (/. γενέσθαι) οὐρανὸν ἢ γῆν ἢ θάλασσαν κτλ. The thought of a series of heavens, as in 2 Cor 12%, may be illustrated from PSI I. 29? (iv/a.p. ἢ) ἐπικαλοῦμέί( = al) σε τὸν καθήμενον ἐν TO πρώτῳ οὐρανῷ .. . ἐν τῷ β οὐρανῷ ... ἐν τῷ Ὑ οὐρανῷ κτλ. Ρ Heid 65 (iv/a.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 126) πιστεύομεν γὰρ τὴν πολιτίαϊν σῆου ἐνν οὐρανῷ is evidently a reminiscence of Phil 4293. On the use of the plur. οὐρανοί in the NT, see Blass Gr. p. 83, and the statistics in Hawkins Hor. Syx.* p. 52f. A new subst. οὐρανουσία occurs in P Lond 1218 (iii/a.p.)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐρανός (ouranos) — heaven.

οὐρᾰνός, ὁ,

Doric dialect and Boeotian dialect ὠρανός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ὄρανος (ὀράνω [Refs 7th c.BC+]

I. heaven: in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. vault or firmament of heaven, sky, γαῖα.. ἐγείνατο ἶσον ἑαυτῇ οὐρανὸν ἀστερόεντα, ἵνα μιν περὶ πάντα καλύπτοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; wrapped in clouds, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; above the aether, [Refs 8th c.BC+] continued to regard it as solid (στερέμνιον), [Refs]; defined as αἰθέρος τὸ ἔσχατον by [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἠέλιος δὲ οὐρανοῦ ἐξαπόλωλε, of an eclipse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. heaven, as the seat of the gods, outside or above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus (see. Ὄλυμπος),[Refs 8th c.BC+]; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ [Refs]; so, later, οἱ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐρανός

ouranos

perhaps from the same as 3735 (through the idea of elevation); the

sky; by extension, heaven (as the abode of God); by implication,

happiness, power, eternity; specially, the Gospel

(Christianity):--air, heaven(-ly), sky.

see GREEK for 3735

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐρανός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

the sky, the heaven

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐρανός ouranos 273x

heaven, the heavens, the visible heavens and all their phenomena, Mt. 5:18; 16:1; 24:29, et al. freq.; the air, atmosphere, in which the clouds and tempests gather, the birds fly, etc., Mt. 6:26; 16:2, 3; heaven as the peculiar seat and abode of God, of angels, of glorified spirits, etc., Mt. 5:34, 45, 48; 6:1, 9, 10; 12:50; Jn. 3:13, 31; 6:32, 38, 41, 42, 50, 51, 58; in NT heaven as a term expressive of the Divine Being, His administration, etc., Mt. 19:14; 21:25; Lk. 20:4, 5; Jn. 3:27

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οὐρανός οὐρα^νός, οῦ, ὁ, only in sg. heaven: in Hom. and Hes.,

the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky, conceived as a concave hemisphere resting on the verge of earth, upborne by the pillars of Atlas, Od., Hes., etc.; conceived to be of solid metal, χάλκεος, πολύχαλκος, σιδήρεος, Hom.: on this vault the sun performed his course, Od.; the stars were fixed upon it, and moved with it, for it was supposed to be always revolving, Il.

heaven, as the seat of the gods, above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus, Hom.; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ Heavengate, which the Hours lifted and put down like a trapdoor, Il.

in common language, heaven, the sky, Hom., etc.; πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβάζειν τινά to exalt to heaven, as Hor. evehere ad Deos, Soph.; εἰς τὸν οὐρ. ἥλλοντο leapt up on high, Xen.: a region of heaven, climate…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hev'-'n.

See ASTRONOMY.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Heaven

(1.) Definitions. The phrase “heaven and earth” is used to indicate the whole universe (Gen. 1:1; Jer. 23:24; Acts 17:24). According to the Jewish notion there were three heavens,

(a) The firmament, as “fowls of the heaven” (Gen. 2:19; 7:3, 23; Ps. 8:8, etc.), “the eagles of heaven” (Lam. 4:19), etc.

(b) The starry heavens (Deut. 17:3; Jer. 8:2; Matt. 24:29).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

There are four Hebrew words thus rendered in the Old Testament which we may briefly notice. Raki’a , Authorized Version, firmament. [FIRMAMENT] Shamayim . This is the word used in the expression "the heaven and the earth," or "the upper and lower regions." (Genesis 1:1) Marom , used for heaven in (Psalms 18:16; Isaiah 24:18; Jeremiah 25:30). Properly speaking it means a mountain as in (Psalms 102:19; Ezekiel 17:23) Shechakim , "expanses," with reference to the extent of heaven. (33:26; Job 35:5) St. Paul’s expression "third heaven," (

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%heaven
heaven60% · 169×heavens32% · 91×air3% · 8×sky3% · 8×other renderings2% · 5×

281 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial53%subject27%object12%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 273 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐκβασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἐν
Article theθησαυρόςa treasure, storκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐκ
λέγωI say, speakArticle theἸωάννηςJohn
ἀπό
θεῖονbrimstone, sulfuκαίand, even, also,ἄγγελοςan angel, messen
ἕωςuntil, as far as
μήNeg
οὐρανόςheaven:273×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐπίὁράωI see, look upon
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτοςπατήρfather, Father, δέbut, on the othe
Article the
μένDisjδύναμαιI am powerful, aἄγγελοςan angel, messen
καταβαίνωI go down, come down
Article theἵναin order that, sἐάνCond
ὅς
δέbut, on the otheArticle theπροακούωI hear beforehan

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐρανός · 273× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Luke Acts John Mark Hebrews 2 Peter Colossians Ephesians 1 Peter 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 305 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

Ἐν ἀρχῇ ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.12c. AD 100

λέγει γὰρ ἡ γραφὴ περὶ ἡμῶν, ὡς λέγει τῷ υἱῷ: Ποιήσωμεν κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμῶν τὸν ἄνθρωπον, καὶ ἀρχέτωσαν τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς καὶ τῶν πετεινῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων τῆς θαλάσσης.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD undated

εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων ἐπὶ

εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον … εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων

τραχείας … … … … … … … … ἐκ τοῦ Σῶσις Οὐρανοῦ κλήρου περὶ κώμην ἠξίωσά τέ σε, καὶ ἕξεις γὰρ παραφεῖναι ἑκάστης ἀρούρης πυροῦ καὶ

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
γυνὴgunē a woman G1135 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
214× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A woman, either married or unmarried, and sometimes specifically a wife, as in Matthew 11:11 and Romans 7:2. This term is also used as a term of respect and endearment.
Amplified meaning
a female figure
Tyndale gloss
woman
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γυνή (i.e., *gunē*) means 'woman' and can refer to any female, including wives and unmarried women. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, such as addressing women with respect or affection. The term also specifically denotes a wife and appears in passages like Matthew 1:20 and 14:3. Lexicons note that it can imply different nuances depending on the context.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ,

[in LXX for אִשָּׁה ;]

a woman, married or unmarried: Mt 11:11 14:21, al.; ὕπανδρος γ., Ro 7:2; γ. χήρα, Lk 4:26; in vocat., γύναι implies neither reproof nor severity, but is used freq. as a term of respect and endearment, Mt 15:28, Jo 2:4, 4:21 19:26.

a wife: Mt 1:20, I Co 7:3, 4 al.; γ. ἀπολύειν, Mk 10:2, al.; γ. ἔχειν Mk 6:18; γ. λαβεῖν, Mk 12:19; γ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ; 1. univ. a woman of any age, whether a virgin, or married, or a widow: Mt. ix. 20; xiii. 33; xxvii. 55; Lk. xiii. 11; Acts v. 14, ete.; ἡ μεμνηστευμένη τινὶ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ἡ ὕπανδρος γυνή, Ro. vii. 2 ; γυνὴ xnpa, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua, | Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife: 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq.; | Eph. ν. 22, ete.; γυνή τινος, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xix. 3,5; Acts v. 1, 7; 1 Co. vii. 2; Eph. v. 28; Rev. ii. 20 [G L WH mrg.], ete. of a betrothed woman: Mt. i. 20, 24. ἡ γυνὴ τοῦ πατρός his step-mother: 1 Co. v. 1 (38 NW, Lev. xviii. 8). ἔχειν γυναῖκα : Mt. xiv.4; xxii. 28; Mk. vi. 18; xii. 23; Lk. xx. 33; see ἔχω, I. 2b. fin. γύναι, as a form of address, may be used — either in indignation, Lk. xxii. 57; or in admiration, Mt. xv. 28; or in kindness and favor, Lk. xiii. 12; Jn. iv. 21; or in respect, Jn. ii. 4; xix. 26, (as in Hom. Il. 3, 204; Od.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γυνή. This old noun retains from Homer down to MGr—where it has only changed its declension (ἡ yvvaika)—the two meanings of ‘‘woman”’ and ‘‘ wife”: it is superfluous to illustrate the one or the other, as we should get no light on the only questions that arise in NT, such as which word to use in rendering Mt 578. The meeting of two words characteristic of that passage does, however, make it worth while to quote Wiinsch 4 58° (iii/A.D.), where Domitiana prays that her lover may be wholly devoted to her, μηδεμίαν ἄλλην γυναῖκα μήτε παρθένον ἐπιθυμοῦντα. That γυναῖκα = ‘* married woman” in Mt /.c. is anyhow probable. The phrase of Mk 1215 ἢ etc., may be paralleled in the oldest word is | | the Κοινή. yovla extant Greek papyrus, P Eleph 1° (B.c. 311) (= Selections, p. 2) λαμβάνει Ἡρακλείδης Δημητρίαν Koray γυναῖκα γνησίαν παρὰ τοῦ πατρός κτλ. The irregularity of the word’s flexion naturally…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γυνή (gunē) — woman.

γῠνή,

Doric dialect γυνά, Boeotian dialect βανά (see entry), ἡ, genitive γυναικός, accusative γυναῖκα, vocative γύναι (γυνή [Refs 6th c.BC+]: Aeolic dialect dative plural γυναίκεσσι [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—woman, opposed to man,[Refs 8th c.BC+] substantive, γ. ταμίη[Refs 8th c.BC+]; γρηΰς (which see), ἀλετρίς (which see), δμῳαὶ γυναῖκες [Refs 8th c.BC+]: vocative, as a term of respect or affection, mistress, lady, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φαντὶ γυναῖκες the lasses say, [Refs]; πρὸς γυναικός like a woman, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅρκους γυναικὸς εἰς ὕδωρ γράφω [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. wife, spouse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to ἑταίρα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γ. γνησία, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also, concubine, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γυνή

gune

probably from the base of 1096; a woman; specially, a wife:--wife,

woman.

see GREEK for 1096

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γυνή, αικός, ἡ

n.f.

a woman, wife, my lady

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γυνή gynē 215x

a woman, Mt. 5:28, et al.; a married woman, wife, Mt. 5:31, 32; 14:3, et al.; in the voc. ὦ γύναι, O woman! an ordinary mode of addressing females under every circumstance; met. used of the Church, as united to Christ, Rev. 19:7; 21:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γυνή Prob. from same Root as γίγνομαι. a woman, Lat. femina, opp. to man, Hom., etc.; with a second Subst., γυνὴ ταμίη housekeeper, δέσποινα γ., δμωαὶ γυναῖκες, etc., id. Hom.:—in voc. often as a term of respect, mistress, lady, Theocr.:— πρὸς γυναικός like a woman, Aesch.

a wife, spouse, opp. to παρθένος, Hom., Xen.

a mortal woman, opp to a goddess, Hom.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

woom'-an ('ishshah, "a woman" (feminine of 'ish, "a man"]; gune, "a woman" "wife"):

I. IN THE CREATIVE PLAN

II. IN OLD TESTAMENT TIMES

1. Prominence of Women

2. Social Equality

3. Marriage Laws

4. Inheritance

5. Domestic Duties

6. Dress and Ornaments

7. Religious Devotion and Service

(1) in Idolatry and False Religion

(2) in Spiritual Religion

III. INTER-TESTAMENTAL ERA

IV. IN NEW TESTAMENT TIMES

1. Mary and Elisabeth

2. Jesus and Women

3. In the Early Church

4. Official Service

5. Widows

6. Deaconesses

IV. LATER TIMES

1. Changes in Character and Condition

2. Notable Examples of Christian Womanhood

3. Woman in the 20th Century

The generic term "man" includes woman. In the narrative of the creation (Ge 1:26,27) Adam is a collective term for mankind. It may signify human being, male or female, or humanity entire. "God said, Let us make man .... and let them"…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Woman

Was “taken out of man” (Gen. 2:23), and therefore the man has the preeminence. “The head of the woman is the man;” but yet honour is to be shown to the wife, “as unto the weaker vessel” (1 Cor. 11:3, 8, 9; 1 Pet. 3:7). Several women are mentioned in Scripture as having been endowed with prophetic gifts, as Miriam (Ex. 15:20), Deborah (Judg. 4:4, 5), Huldah (2 Kings 22:14), Noadiah (Neh. 6:14), Anna (Luke 2:36, 37), and the daughters of Philip the evangelist…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Is spoken of in Scripture as the beloved and honored companion and helpmeet, not the servant, of man, Ge 2:23,24, created as the necessary completion of man, Ge 3:16 1Co 11:3,8,9 14:34,35 1Ti 2:11-14, yet specially qualified for that sphere, and as necessary in it as man in his. Man and woman are indeed essentially one, the natural qualities of each so responding to those of the other as to lay the foundation of the most tender and abiding unity. The Bible thus raised the Jewish woman high above the woman of heathenism; and the Old Testament contains some of the finest portraitures of female character. But still greater is the contrast between the women of heathenism and…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Origin and cause of the name

Ge 2:23

- ORIGINALLY MADE

. By God in his own image

Ge 1:27

. From one of Adam's ribs

Ge 2:21,22

. For man

1Co 11:9

. To be an helpmeet for man

Ge 2:18,20

. Subordinate to man

1Co 11:3

. To be the glory of man

1Co 11:7

- Deceived by Satan

Ge 3:1-6; 2Co 11:3; 1Ti 2:14

- Led man to disobey God

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
41%woman
woman41% · 90×wife32% · 71×women15% · 33×wives5% · 11×other renderings2% · 5×other renderings5% · 11×

221 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject43%object23%adverbial16%predicate6%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 214 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςἀπολύωI release, let g
καίand, even, also, nam
τέDisjδέbut, on the otheἈβιάProp
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theκεφαλήthe headπᾶςall, the whole,
αὐτός
ἔχωI have, hold, poπροσέρχομαιI come near, conλέγωI say, speak
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,
γυνήa woman214×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀνήρa male human beiἀδελφόςa brotherγάρfor
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπαιδίονa little child, μήNeg
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,μήNegδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐν
μοιχείαadulteryμέσοςmiddle, in the mκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
μήNeg
ζητέωI seek, search fφοβέωI fear, am terriἅπτωI touch or handl

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγυνή · 214× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Luke Matthew John Acts Revelation Mark 1 Timothy Ephesians 1 Peter Colossians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 424 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 124c. AD 40

πάλιν δ’ αὖ γυναιξὶν ἡ φορὰ τῶν καταμηνίων εἰς ἑπτὰ τὰς πλείστας ἡμέρας χορηγεῖται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ Σάρρας τῆς Ἁβράμου γυναικός, καὶ πῶς τὸν βίον κατέστρεψεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.2c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε οὖν περὶ τοῦ λαοῦ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή: Ἐδεῖτο δὲ Ἰσαὰκ περὶ Ῥεβέκκας τῆς γυναικὸς αὐτοῦ, ὅτι στεῖρα ἦν: καὶ συνέλαβεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 25Pathyris104 BC

ὠνὴν Αἰγυπτίαν ἥν ἔθετο διʼ Ἐσπνούθιος Αἰγυπτίου μονογράφου Κροκοδίλων πόλεως Τνεφερῶτι τῇ τοῦ Νεχθανούπιος γυναικὶ ἀντὶ τῆς παρακεχωρημένης ἐν τῆι ἄνω σφραγῖδι ἀρούρας μιᾶς ἡμίσους τετάρτου ὑφʼ ὑμῶν· καὶ

P.Grenf. 2 26Pathyris104 BC

εἰς τὸν Ταρεήσιος λόγον τῆς αὐτοῦ μητρὸς τοῖς δανεισταῖς Χαιρήμωνι καὶ Ἐσθλαδᾷ καὶ Πνήφει γυναικὶ καὶ ἀδελφῇ· καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι Ὧρον μηδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν

P.Grenf. 2 30Pathyris103 BC

τὰ προγεγραμμένα. τοῦτο δʼ ἐστὶν τὸ ὀφείλημα ὃ ὤφειλεν Ἁρπὼς Παβῦτος καὶ ἡ τούτου γυνὴ Ταρεῆσις. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
περιβεβλημένηperiballō having been clothed with G4016 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To clothe or invest someone with something, like putting on clothes or a palisade, as seen in Matthew 25:36 and Luke 23:11. This can also mean to array or put on something, like a garment or a defense.
Amplified meaning
arrayed, dressed
Tyndale gloss
to clothe
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

περιβάλλω means to throw around or over, often used in the context of clothing or wrapping oneself. It can also refer to surrounding or enclosing something, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 25:36 and Luke 23:11. The word is built from the prefix περί (around) and βάλλω (to throw). There is a notable usage in Revelation, where it describes being wrapped or clothed in various contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-βάλλω,

[in LXX chiefly for כּסה pi., also for לבשׁ, עטה, etc.;]

to throw around or over, put on or over;

of siege or defensive works: χάρακά σοι, Lk 19:43 (WH, mg.; παρεμβ-, WH, txt.);

of clothing, to put on, wrap about, clothe with: c. acc. rei, Lk 23:11; c. acc. pers., Mt 25:36, 38, 43; c. dupl. acc. (not cl.; Bl., § 34, 4), Jo 19:2; pf. pass., to have wrapped round one: c. acc. rei (cl.), Mk 14:51 16:5, Re 7:9, 13 10:1 11:3 12:1 17:4 18:16 19:13; c. dat. rei, Re 4:4 (WH, txt.; seq. ἐν, WH, mg.); fut., seq. ἐν (cf.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περι-βάλλω : fut. περιβαλῶ ; 2 aor. περιέβαλον ; pf. pass. ptep. περιβεβλημένος ; 2 aor. mid. περιεβαλόμην ; 2 fut. mid. περιβαλοῦμαι ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for D3 to cover, cover up; also for way to clothe, and πιὸ» to veil; to throw around, to put round; a. UNG

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιβάλλω. For a good parallel to the TR of Lk 19% cr. P Oxy IV. 70782 (¢. A.D. 136) where a man is charged with neglecting a vineyarl—pySt τὰς πλάτας περιβεβληκέναι, “not even to have built the enclosing walls.” For the meaning ‘‘ wrap about,” ‘* clothe myself,’’ as in Mk 1451 (cf. Field Mores, p. 40), see P Fay 1218 (c, n.c. 103) ἐξέδυσαν ὃ περ[ιεἸβεβλήμην ἱμάτιον, ‘they stripped me of the garment in which I was clothed,” P Grenf I. 384 (ii/iB.c.) (asemended Berichtigungen, Ῥ. 182) ὅ τε περιεβλήμην ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, aud the

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιβάλλω (periballō) — to clothe.

περιβάλλω,

future -βᾰλῶ: aorist περιέβᾰλον (see. below):— throw round, about, or over, put on or over, with accusative of things, φίλας περὶ χεῖρε βαλόντε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. τινὶ δεσμά, βρόχους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινὰ χαλκεύματι put him round the sword, i. e. stab him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also περὶ τὰ στέρνα θώρηκας π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ ἕρμα π. ναῦν wreck it on.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, throw round or over oneself, put on, with accusative of things, περιβαλλόμενοι τεύχεα putting on their arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἷμα, φᾶρος περιβάλλεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently of defences, τεῖχος καὶ σωτηρίην περιβαλέσθαι τοῖς τε χρήμασι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λιμένι τεῖχος, χάρακα τῇ παρεμβολῇ, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; also περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον τεῖχος π. [Refs 5th c.BC+] build a wall round it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in perfect…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιβάλλω

periballo

from 4012 and 906; to throw all around, i.e. invest (with a palisade

or with clothing):--array, cast about, clothe(-d me), put on.

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 906

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιβάλλω

v.

I cast around, clothe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιβάλλω periballō 23x

to cast around; to clothe, Mt. 25:36, 38, 43; mid. to clothe one’s self, to be clothed, Mt. 6:29, 31; Lk. 23:11; Jn. 19:2; Acts 12:8; Rev. 4:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περιβάλλω fut. -βα^λῶ aor2 -έβα^λον to throw round, περὶ χαῖρε βαλών having thrown his arms round him, Od.; χέρας π. τινί Eur.; περὶ δ᾽ ὠλένας δέρᾳ βάλοιμι id. Eur.; π. τινὶ δεσμά Aesch.; π. ναῦν περὶ ἕρμα to wreck it on a reef, Thuc.:—Mid. to throw round oneself, put on, c. acc. rei, τεύχεα περιβαλλόμενοι putting on their arms, Od.; π. ἔρυμα, ἕρκος, τείχεα to throw round oneself for defence, Hdt.; c. dupl. acc., τεῖχος περιβάλλεσθαι πόλιν to build a wall round it, id. Hdt.:—in perf. pass. to have a thing put round one, Plat.; περιβεβλημένος τὸ τεῖχος having his wall around him, id. Plat.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-NSF — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-NSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%having clothed themselves with
having clothed themselves with13% · 3×having been clothed with9% · 2×do yourself wrap around4% · 1×will be clothed4% · 1×you may be clothed4% · 1×having clothed themselves4% · 1×having clothed himself with4% · 1×having clothed themselves in4% · 1×other renderings52% · 12×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
δόξαhonor, renown, gσυνακολουθέωI accompanyλέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
γυμνόςwearing only the
ἵναin order that, so th
λευκόςwhite, brightαὐτός
Article the
οὗτοςμέγας
τίςIrg
Disj
περιβάλλωhaving been clothed with23×
what comes after →
Article the
ἱμάτιονouter garmentστολήa long robeἥλιοςthe sun, sunligh
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
εἷςone
ἐγώ
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sickἀσθενήςweak, infirm, si
στολήa long robe
λευκόςwhite, bright
ἐν
ἱμάτιονouter garment

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριβάλλω · 23× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Luke Mark Acts John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 39 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 65c. AD 40

ἤδη τινὰ τῶν παλαιῶν φασι καθάπερ ἐκπρεπεστάτης γυναικὸς τῷ σοφίας ἐπιμανέντα κάλλει πολυτελεστάτης πομπῆς θεασάμενον παρασκευὴν ἄφθονον, ἀπιδόντα πρός τινας τῶν συνήθων εἰπεῖν „ἴδετε, ὦ ἑταῖροι, ὅσων χρείαν οὐκ ἔχω“, καίτοι γε ἔξω τῶν ἀναγκαίων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.270c. AD 75–95

ἐπεὶ δʼ εὐτρεπὲς ἦν τὸ δεῖπνον, ἐρίφου δέρματι τὸν βραχίονα περιβαλών, ἵνα πιστεύοιτο παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ διὰ τὴν δασύτητα Ἡσαῦς εἶναι, τὰ γὰρ ἄλλα πάντʼ ὢν ὅμοιος διὰ τὸ εἶναι δίδυμος τούτῳ μόνῳ διέφερε, καὶ φοβηθεὶς μὴ πρὶν γενέσθαι τὰς εὐχὰς εὑρεθεὶς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Heid. 2 217Kerkeosiris? (Arsinoites)201 BC–102 BC

μέρος τοῦ σώματος καὶ διέκοψάν μου τὴν κεφαλὴν ῥάβδοις κραναίναις καὶ ἐξέδυσαν μηλωτὴν ἣν περιβεβλημένος ἱμάτιον ἔσχον ἀξίαν δραχμῶν ρε ὥς με διαφυγεῖν καὶ κινδυνεύειν με τῷ βίωι· ἐπιδίδωμι

P.Cair. Masp. 1 67005Antinoopolis (?)AD 568

Ἱερημίου τινος τῆς κώμης βοηθοῦ· ἀκουόμενος … του … θαλμου καὶ … σιν θανασίμοις περιβαλὼν ὁ εἰρημένος τιμωρητὴς Σενούθης ἀνείλετο αὐτόν· ἐκ δευτέρου δὲ κατὰ μηχανοπανουργίας τρόπον … σε

P.Lond. 5 1729SyeneAD 584

μελετῆσαί τινα κατὰ σοῦ ὡς μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν τελευτὴν ἐνάγειν σοι ὁμολογῶ ὁμνύων τὸ περιβεβλημένον μοι σχῆμα ὅτι οὐδὲν μοι χρεωστεῖς οὔτε δέδωμεν σοι τί ποτε ἢ πεπράσκειν σοί

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ἥλιον,hēlios sun, G2246 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
32× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'sun' is used in the Bible to describe the sun and its effects, such as in Matthew 5:45 and Revelation 1:16. It can also imply light and is used to describe Jesus as the light of the world.
Amplified meaning
the light of God's presence
Tyndale gloss
sun
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἥλιος (i.e., *helios*) means 'the sun.' It appears frequently in the New Testament, including verses like Matthew 5:45 and Revelation 1:16. The term can also imply light, as seen in Acts 13:11. The word is built from the root meaning 'ray,' and it has been used in various contexts, including as a proper name for the sun-god Helios.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἥλιος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for שֶׁמֶשׁ;]

the sun: with art. (Bl., § 46, 5), Mt 5:45 13:43 17:2 24:29, Mk 1:32 4:6 13:24 16:2, Lk 4:40, Ac 2:20(LXX) 26:13, Eph 4:26, Ja 1:11, Re 1:16 6:12 8:12 9:2 10:1 12:1 16:8 19:17 21:23; βλέπειν τὸν ἥ., Ac 13:11; οὐδὲ μὴ πέσῃ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ὁ ἥ., Re 7:16; without art., Mt 13:6, Lk 21:25 23:45, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἥλιος, του, ὁ [often anarthrous, W. 120 (114); B. 89 (78) ], (€An [root us to burn, ef. Curtius § 6127); Sept. for wow; the sun: Mt. v.45; xiii. 43; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. iv. 40; xxi. 25; Acts xxvi. 13; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. i. 16, ete. i. q. the rays of the sun, Rev. vii. 16; i. 4: the light of day: μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον, of a blind man, Acts xiii. 11.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἥλιος. P Hib I. 2739 (a calendar—s.c. 301-240) ἔλεγεν δὲ [δύο] τὰς πορείας εἶναι Tod ἡλίου pla (/. μίαν) μὲν τὴν διορίζουσαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν μία (1. μίαν) δὲ τὴν ϑιορίζουσαν χιμῶνα καὶ θέρος, ““Πε said that the courses of the sun were two, one dividing night and day and one dividing winter and summer” (Edd.), P Petr III. 144'¥ 39 (B.c. 246) ἡλίου περὶ καταφορὰν ὄντος, ‘at sunset,’’ P Oxy IV. 725™ (a.p. 183) ἀπὸ ἀν[ατολῆς] ἡ[λίου] μέχρι δύσεως, and an astronomical dialogue of ili/A.D., P Ryl Il. 634, where in answer to a question regarding certain εἴδωλα, it is replicd—Hdtds [ἐσῆτιν δεξιὸς ὀφθαλμός, Σελήνη ὁ εὐώνυμος : see also the ii/B.c. papyrus of the astronomer E idoxus, καθ᾽ ὃν ὃ ἥλιος φερόμενος τὴν μὲν ἡμέραν βραχυτέραν ποιεῖ τὴν δὲ νύκτα μακροτέραν. Two instances may be added from the inscrr., J/ichel 466'° (iii/B.c.) ἅμα τῶι ἡλίωι [ἀν]ατέλλοντι, 20. 135779 (B.C. 300299) ἡλίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἥλιος (hēlios) — sun.

ἥλιος, ὁ,

Epic dialect ἠέλιος, as always in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (except in the late passage [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἀέλιος [ᾱ] [Refs 5th c.BC+], but ἅλιος [ᾱ], [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Cretan dialect ἀβέλιος (i.e. ἀϝ-), [Refs 5th c.AD+]: Aeolic dialect ἀέλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἄλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] ἀέλιος (or ἁ-) [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— sun, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁρᾶν φάος ἠελίοιο to see the light of life, live, [Refs], etc.; ὑπ᾽ ἠελίῳ τε καὶ οὐρανῷ ἀστερόεντι ναιετάουσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἑωρᾶσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥσπερ σελήνη γ᾽ ἡλίῳ (i.e. ὅμοιος) a pale reflection, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἥλιος

helios

from hele (a ray; perhaps akin to the alternate of 138); the sun; by

implication, light:--+ east, sun.

see GREEK for 138

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἥλιος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

the sun, sunlight

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἥλιος hēlios 32x

the sun, Mt. 13:43; 17:2; Mk. 1:32; meton. light of the sun, light, Acts 13:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἥλιος ἥλιος, ὁ, the sun, Lat. sol, Hom., etc.; ὁρᾶν φάος ἠελίοιο, i.e. to be alive, Il.—The Sun furnished the earliest mode of determining the points of the heaven, πρὸς ἠῶ τ᾽ ἠέλιόν τε, i. e. towards the East, opp. to πρὸς ζόφον, Hom.; πρὸς ἠῶ τε καὶ ἡλίου ἀνατολάς, opp. to πρὸς ἑσπέρην, Hdt.

day, a day, like Lat. soles, Pind., Eur.: so in pl. hot sunny days, Thuc.

as prop. n., Helios, the sun-god, Hom.; in later Poets = Apollo, Aesch., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Sun

(Heb. shemesh), first mentioned along with the moon as the two great luminaries of heaven (Gen. 1:14-18). By their motions and influence they were intended to mark and divide times and seasons. The worship of the sun was one of the oldest forms of false religion (Job 31:26,27), and was common among the Egyptians and Chaldeans and other pagan nations. The Jews were warned against this form of idolatry (Deut. 4:19; 17:3; comp. 2 Kings 23:11; Jer. 19:13).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

In the history of "greater light," of the creation the sun is described as "greater light," in contradistinction to the moon, the "lesser light," in conjunction with which it was to serve "for signs and for seasons, and for days, and for years," while its special office was "to rule the day." (Genesis 1:14-16) The "signs" referred to were probably such extraordinary phenomena as eclipses, which were regarded as conveying premonitions of coming events. (Jeremiah 10:2; Matthew 24:29) with Luke 21:25 The joint influence assigned to the sun and moon in deciding the "seasons," both for agricultural operations and for religious festivals, and also in regulating the length and…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The great luminary of day, which furnishes so many similitudes to the Hebrew poets, as well as those of all nations, Jud 5:31 Ps 84:11 Pr 4:18 Lu 1:78,79 Joh 8:12. For the idolatrous worship of the sun, see BAAL.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Created Ge 1:14-18; Ps 74:16; 136:7; Jer 31:35

→ Rising and setting of Ec 1:5

→ Diurnal motion of Ps 19:4,6

→ Worship of, forbidden De 4:19; 17:3

→ Worshiped Job 31:26-28; Jer 8:2; Eze 6:4,6; 8:16

→ Kings of Judah dedicate horses to 2Ki 23:11

→ Miracles concerning

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
94%sun
sun94% · 30×the sun3% · 1×when sun3% · 1×

32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject63%object16%adverbial16%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 32 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ὡςas, like as, howἐκεῖνοςἀνατέλλωI make to rise,
ἀνατολήrising of the sun, t
ἀπό
ἐν
σημεῖονa sign, miracle,
δέbut, on the other ha
μήτεNeg
δόξαhonor, renown, glory
ἄλλοςother, another,
ἥλιοςsun,32×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσελήνηthe moonἄλλοςother, another,
σκοτίζωI darken
καίand, even, also,
οὐδέNeg
πᾶςall, the whole, Article the
αὐτός
ἀνατέλλωI make to rise,
δέbut, on the other ha
ἀνατέλλωI make to rise,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἥλιος · 32× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Acts Mark Luke 1 Corinthians Ephesians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 66 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.31c. AD 75–95

τῇ τετάρτῃ δὲ διακοσμεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἡλίῳ καὶ σελήνῃ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἄστροις κινήσεις αὐτοῖς ἐπιστείλας καὶ δρόμους, οἷς ἂν αἱ τῶν ὡρῶν περιφοραὶ σημαίνοιντο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.10c. AD 100

εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἦλθεν ἐν σαρκί, οὐδ̓ ἄν πως οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐσώθησαν βλέποντες αὐτόν, ὅτε τὸν μέλλοντα μὴ εἶναι ἥλιον, ἔργου τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχοντα, ἐμβλέποντες οὐκ ἰσχύουσιν εἰς τὰς ἀκτῖνας αὐτοῦ ἀντοφθαλμῆσαι:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 74 5017OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 200

Διὶ Ἡλίῳ μεγάλῳ Σαράπιδι καὶ τοῖς συννάοις θεοῖς. ἀξιοῖ Εὔφορος, εἰ ἀνακτήσομαι, τοῦτό μοι δός.

P.Oxy. 74 5018OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 200

Διὶ Ἡλίῳ μεγάλῳ Σαράπιδι καὶ τοῖς συννάοις θεοῖς. ἀξιοῖ Θέων ὁ καὶ Πτολεμαῖος· εἰ σύμφορόν μοί

P.Stras. 2 122ArsinoitesAD 161–AD 169

ἡ Θαισᾶς μετὰ τὴν ἑαυτης τελευτὴν προσ… … αξ … … ὑπὸ Δία Γῆν Ἥλιον καὶ διὰ τοῦ ἐνκυκλίου καὶ ὧν ἄλλων καθήκει, καὶ εὐδοκεῖν τῇ ἐσομένῃ αὐτῆς διὰ

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
σελήνηselēnē moon G4582 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for moon, used in the Bible to describe the moon as a celestial body, appears in Matthew 24:29 and Revelation 6:12. It represents the moon's attractiveness and beauty. The moon is also mentioned in Luke 21:25.
Tyndale gloss
moon
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σελήνη (selēnē) means 'the moon' and is derived from the idea of brightness. It appears in various contexts, including the New Testament in verses like Matthew 24:29 and Revelation 12:1. The word has associations with lunar cycles and was used in ancient texts for both astronomical and astrological references. It is also noted as a feminine proper name for the moon goddess Selene.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σελήνη, -ης, ἡ

[in LXX chiefly for יָרֵחַ (Ge 37:9, al.), also for לְבָנָה; (Ca 6:9 (10), Is 24:23א, 30:26) ;]

the moon: Mt 24:29, Mk 13:24, Lk 21:25, Ac 2:20 (LXX), I Co 15:41, Re 6:12 8:12 12:1 21:23.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σελήνη, -ης, 7, (fr. σέλας brightness), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. m0, the moon: Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 20; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 12; viii. 12; xii. 1; xxi. 23.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σελήνη, “the moon”: P Hib I. 27! (calendar—s.c. 301-240) Xpavt[at] ταῖς κατὰ σελήνηϊν] ἡμέραις οἱ ἀστρολόϊγοι, where the editors think that there isa loose mode of speaking of ‘the days of the month” without any real reference to the moon: see their note. The word occurs in the horoscopes BGU III. 9573 (B.c. 10), PSI IV. 312° (A.D. 345), and in P Ryl I. 63% (iii/a.p.), where, in an imaginary astrological dialogue with Plato, a certain Egyptian prophet connects the moon with the left eye—ZeAjvy ὁ εὐώνυμος. For the moon as the female principle of all physical life see P Osl I. p. 127, and for the importance of the rising moon, see 76. p. 93. Iai J ΡΞ (CHLEs (8:Ὁ: 165} (SSI job ΣΙ8. (07224 xb Joh 5353) mention is made of the festival τὰ DeAnveeta (cf. Mayser Gr. 1. pp. 75, 107, 448), and in the temple inventory BGU I. 1621 (ii/iii A.D.) we hear of ἄλλα σεληνάρια μεικρὰ χρυσᾶ β, by which…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σελήνη (selēnē) — moon.

σελήν-η, ἡ,

Doric dialect σελάνα [λᾱ] [Refs 5th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect σελάννα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; compare also σεληναίη:— the moon, σ. πλήθουσα the full-moon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σ. ἀεξομένη, ὀλίγη κεράεσσι, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; a moon's breadth, measure used by early astronomers, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; νουμηνία κατὰ σελήνην, i.e. by the lunar month, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς ἡμέρας κατὰ σ. ἄγειν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; πρὸς τὴν σ. ὁρᾶν by moonlight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐκ τῆς σ. νόσος,= σεληνιασμός, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὴν σ. καθελεῖν, of Thessalian witches, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σελήνη

selene

from selas (brilliancy; probably akin to the alternate of 138, through

the idea of attractiveness); the moon:--moon.

see GREEK for 138

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σελήνη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

the moon

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σελήνη selēnē 9x

the moon, Mt. 24:29; Mk. 13:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σελήνη σελήνη, ἡ, σέλας the moon, Lat. luna, Hom.; ς. πλήθουσα the full- moon, Il.; νουμηνία κατὰ σελήνην, i. e. by the lunar month, Thuc.; πρὸς τὴν σελήνην by moonlight, Xen.; so, εἰς τὴν ς. Aeschin.:— τὴν ς. καθαιρεῖν, Hor.'s lunam deducere, of witches, Ar.; δεκάτῃ σελήνῃ in the tenth moon (i. e. month), Eur.

as fem. prop. n., Selene, the goddess of the moon, Hes., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

moon (yareach; meaning obscure--probably "wanderer"; by some given as "paleness"; selene): The moon was very early worshipped by the nations of the Far East as a divinity or the representative of one or more deities. These deities were both masculine and feminine. In Assyria and Babylonia the most common name for the moon-god was Sin or Sen. In Babylonia he was also called Aku and Nannara. In Egypt the moon was representative of several deities, all masculine. The chief of these was Thoth the god of knowledge, so called because the moon was the measurer of time. Babylonia has, also, Aa, the goddess of the moon, as the consort of the sun, while her equivalent was known in Phoenicia as Ashtaroth-karnaim. This personification and worship of the moon among the nations who were neighbors to Palestine was but part of an elaborate Nature-worship found among these people. Nor was this worship…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Moon

Heb. yareah, from its paleness (Ezra 6:15), and lebanah, the “white” (Cant. 6:10; Isa. 24:23), was appointed by the Creator to be with the sun “for signs, and for seasons, and for days, and years” (Gen. 1:14-16). A lunation was among the Jews the period of a month, and several of their festivals were held on the day of the new moon. It is frequently referred to along with the sun (Josh. 10:12; Ps. 72:5, 7, 17; 89:36, 37; Eccl. 12:2; Isa. 24:23, etc.), and…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The moon held an important place in the kingdom of nature, as known to the Hebrews. Conjointly with the sun, it was appointed "for signs and for seasons, and for days and years;" though in this respect it exercised a more important influence, if by the "seasons" we understand the great religious festivals of the Jews, as is particularly stated in (Psalms 104:19) and more at length in Ecclus 43:6,7. The worship of the moon prevailed extensively among the nations of the East, and under a variety of aspects. It was one of the only two deities which commanded the reverence of all the Egyptians. The worship of the heavenly bodies is referred to in (Job 31:26,27) and Moses directly warns the Jews against it. (4:19) In the figurative language of Scripture, the moon is frequently…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This beautiful and stately ruler of the night, Ge 1:16, is one of the chief witnesses to mankind of the goodness, wisdom, and power of the Creator, Ps 8:3; and as receiving all its light from the sun, and reflecting it on all around, it is a striking image of the church of Christ. In the clear sky of the East, the moon shines with peculiar brilliancy; and it was worshipped by most nations of antiquity, either directly, or as an idol-goddess under the name of Ashtoreth, Artemis, Diana, Hecate, Meni, Mylitta, Maja, etc. The Hebrews were specially cautioned against this form of idolatry, De 4:19 17:3; and yet fell into it; 2Ki 21:3

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 20 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 31c. AD 40

καὶ ἔστιν ὑπερουράνιος ἀστήρ, πηγὴ τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀστέρων, ἣν οὐκ ἂν ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καλέσειεν ἄν τις παναύγειαν, ἀφ’ ἧς ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πλάνητές τε καὶ ἀπλανεῖς ἀρύτονται, καθ’ ὅσον ἑκάστῳ δύναμις, τὰ πρέποντα φέγγη, τῆς ἀμιγοῦς καὶ καθαρᾶς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.31c. AD 75–95

τῇ τετάρτῃ δὲ διακοσμεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἡλίῳ καὶ σελήνῃ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἄστροις κινήσεις αὐτοῖς ἐπιστείλας καὶ δρόμους, οἷς ἂν αἱ τῶν ὡρῶν περιφοραὶ σημαίνοιντο.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 20.3c. AD 96

ἥλιός τε καὶ σελήνη, ἀστέρων τε χοροὶ κατὰ τὴν διαταγὴν αὐτοῦ ἐν ὁμονοίᾳ δίχα πάσης παρεκβάσεως ἐξελίσσουσιν τοὺς ἐπιτεταγμένους αὐτοῖς ὁρισμούς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Sarap. 6Tou (Hermopolites)AD 100

τοῦ κυρίου κολλήματος ϙϚ Μωχείτου … … ων Πυρίων Φίλωνος διὰ Κλεοδώρου Δαμίωνος ὑπὲρ Σελήνης Ἀχιλλέως κατοίκων … ι Πάτρη ἄνω Τλήθμεως κατοίκων δέκα γίνονται ι

P.Sarap. 57HermopolitesAD 90–AD 133

r λόγων λημμάτων Φαρμοῦθι γ διὰ Σελήνης δραχμαὶ κδ δ διὰ Σελήνης δραχμαὶ ιϛ ε διὰ Σελήνης δραχμαὶ κ καὶ πυροῦ

P.Amh. 2 131Memphis (?)AD 90–AD 133

πολλὰς καὶ διὰ τοῦ δούλου δὲ Σαραπίωνος καὶ διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ. ἔρρωσο Σελήνη ἀδελφή

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ὑποκάτωhupokatō under G5270 Adverb
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Under refers to something below or beneath something else, like in Matthew 22:44 and Mark 6:11. It describes a physical location. In the Bible, it is often used to show something is under God's authority. This word is used in many books, including Luke and Revelation.
Tyndale gloss
under
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑποκάτω (*hupokatō*) means 'under' or 'below.' It functions primarily as an adverb and can also act as a preposition with a genitive. The New Testament uses it in several verses, including Matthew 22:44 and Mark 6:11. Various lexicons confirm its meaning, but they differ slightly in its grammatical usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπο-κάτω comp. adv. (v. M, Pr., 99),

[in LXX chiefly for תַּחַת ;]

below, under: as prep. c. gen., Mt 22:44, Mk 6:11 7:28 12:36 (Rec., R, txt., ὑποπόδιον, as in LXX), Lk 8:16, Jo 1:51, He 2:8(LXX), Re 5:3, 13 6:9 12:1.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπο-κάτω, under, underneath: τινός [W. § 54,6; B. § 146, 1], Mt. xxii.44 LT Tr WH; Mk. vi. 11; vii. 28; fii. 36 WH]; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. i. 50 (51); Heb. ii. 8; Rev. v. 3, 13 [Tr mrg. br. the cl.]; vi. 9; xii.1. (Sept.; Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.) [Cf. W. § 50, 7.N.1; B. § 146, 4.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑποκάτω, ““below,”’ ‘‘under,” “underneath,” as prep. c. gen., P Petr III. 37(4)"-2 (iii/B.c.) ὑποκάζτω τοῦ παλαιο]ῦ x%p[a]t[os, P Lond 46348 (iv/A.D.) (=I. p. 76) ὑποκάτω τοῦ κρίκον, and P Oxy VI. 9227! (vi/vii A.D.) τὸ φοράδιν τὸ ἀποθανὼν ὑποκάτω Μηνᾶ μειζοτέρ(ου), “τῆς mare which died belonged to Menas the official” (Edd.). See also PSI V. 488!° (B.c. 258-7) τὰ ἐπάνω τίῆς Ὁ] “Hdbalctov κρηπῖδος kal τὰ ὑποκάτω, P Tebt I. 10619 (B.c, 101) ἢ ἐπάνωι ἢ ἣ ὑποκάτωι γῆι, and P Lond 467° (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 72) τὸ ὑποκάτω.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑποκάτω (hupokatō) — under.

ὑποκάτω [ᾰ],

adverb below, under, with genitive, ὑ. τῆς ἐκροῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. παραγράψαι τι [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. in Logic, τὸ ὑ. γένος the subordinate genus, opposed to τὸ ἐπάνω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑποκάτω

hupokato

from 5259 and 2736; down under, i.e. beneath:--under.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 2736

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑποκάτω

Adv

underneath

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑποκάτω hypokatō 11x

can function as an improper prep., under, beneath, underneath, Mk. 6:11; 7:28; met. Heb. 2:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑποκάτω below, under, c. gen., Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
91%under
under91% · 10×footstool9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial64%predicate18%object9%subject9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
ἐχθρόςhated, hostile, ὁράωI see, look upon
Article the
χοῦςdust
κυνάριονa little dog
Article the
Disj
σκεῦοςa vessel to cont
ὑποτάσσωI place under, subje
πᾶςall, the whole,
ὑποκάτωunder11×
what comes after →
Article the
πούςthe footγῆthe earth, soil,τράπεζαa table for food
κλίνηa couch, bed, mat, b
τίθημιI put, place

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑποκάτω · 11× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Hebrews John Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 48 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Sobriety 8c. AD 40

„ἔλαβε„ γάρ φησιν „ἄρτους καὶ ἀσκὸν ὕδατος καὶ ἔδωκεν Ἄγαρ, καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ἐπὶ τὸν ὦμον καὶ τὸ παιδίον“, ἡνίκα αὐτοὺς οἴκοθεν Ἀβραὰμ ἐξέπεμψε, καὶ πάλιν „ἔρριψε τὸ παιδίον ὑποκάτω μιᾶς ἐλάτης„, καὶ „οὐ μὴ ἴδω τὸν θάνατον τοῦ παιδίου„ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 9.12c. AD 75–95

Ἅμα δʼ ἡμέρᾳ προελθὼν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τὴν ὑποκάτω Θεκώας πόλεως ἔλεγε πρὸς τὸ πλῆθος, ὡς δεῖ πιστεύειν τοῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ προφήτου εἰρημένοις καὶ μὴ παρατάσσεσθαι μὲν αὐτοὺς εἰς μάχην, προστησαμένους δὲ τοὺς ἱερεῖς μετὰ τῶν σαλπίγγων καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. BC undated
O.Claud. 4 749Mons ClaudianusAD 98–AD 117

ὑποκάτω ο ἐπάνωι ιδ γίνονται πδ καὶ ἀπόλυσον εἰς τὴν λατομίαν ἄνδ … καὶ Πετεσ

O.Did. 400DidymoiAD 120–AD 125

καὶ παρ’ ἐμαυτῆς ἐκτέτεικα. μιμνησκομένη σου τῆς ἐλεημοσύνης … μοι ὅτι τὰ ἑξήκοντα … ὑποκάτω ην … μου αὐτῆς

JEA 53 (1967), p. 126 no. 4Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 126

οἰκίας καὶ αἰθρίου ἐν κώμηι Κερκεσούχοις, ὅ ἔχεται τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι ἡμίσους μέρους τοῦ ὑποκάτω … … … ταμιείου. ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς ἐπιβεβληκυῖας αὐτῶι Ἀπολλωνίωι ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς βορρᾶ

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
τῶνho the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ποδῶνpous feet G4228 Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
93× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'foot' is used literally and figuratively in the Bible, as seen in Matthew 4:6 and Mark 9:45. It can refer to a person's foot or an animal's foot, and is also used symbolically in Romans 16:20 and 1 Corinthians 15:25.
Amplified meaning
in subjection to her authority
Tyndale gloss
foot
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πούς (pous) means 'foot' and can refer to the feet of both humans and animals. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including metaphoric uses related to movement and authority, such as being under someone's feet (Romans 16:20). The word is built from a primary root and is used in phrases that denote proximity or action, reflecting its significance in both literal and figurative language.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πούς, ποδός, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for רֶגֶל;]

a foot, both of men and beasts: Mt 4:6(LXX), Mk 9:45, Lk 1:79, Jo 11:44, Ac 7:5, al.; ὑπο τοὺς π., Ro 16:20, I Co 15:25, 27, Eph 1:22, He 2:8; ὑποκάτω τῶν π., Mt 22:44(LXX); πρὸς (παρὰ) τοὺς π., Mk 5:22, Lk 8:41, al.; fig., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πούς (not ποῦς, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 765; Gétiling, Accentl. p. 244; [Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 566]; W. § 6, 1d.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p.48), ποδός, 6, [allied νυ. πέδον, πέζα, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291; Vanivek p. 473], dat. plur. ποσίν, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 939; a foot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6; vii. 6; xxii. 13; Mk. ix.45; Lk.i. 79; Jn. xi.44; Acts vii.5; 1 Co. xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental practice of placing the foot upon the vanquished (Josh. x. 24), come the foll. expressions: ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας συντρίβειν (q: ν.) τινά, Ro. xvi. 20; ὑποτάσσειν τινά, 1 Co. xv. 27; Eph. i. 22; Heb. ii. 8; τιθέναι, 1 Co. xv. 25; τιθέναι τινὰ ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 441, T Tr WH; ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν, Mt. xxii. 44 RG; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH ὑποκάτω τ. 7]; Lk. xx. 43; Actsii. 35; Heb. i. 13; x.13; disciples listening to their teacher’s instruction are said…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πούς (pous) — foot.

πούς, ὁ, ποδός, ποδί, πόδα

(not ποῦν, Thom.Mag.p.257 R.): dative plural ποσί, Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ποσσί (also [Refs 5th c.BC+] once πόδεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+] Epic dialect ποδοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect nominative πός (compare ἀρτίπος, πούλυπος, etc.) [Refs], but πούς [Refs]; πῶς· πός, ὑπὸ Δωριέων, [Refs 5th c.AD+] (perhaps πός· πούς, ὑ.Δ.); Laconian dialect πόρ, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—foot, both of men and beasts, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in plural, also, a bird's talons, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; arms or feelers of a polypus, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly the foot from the ankle down wards, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ξύλινος π., of an artificial foot, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but also of the leg with the foot, as χείρ for the arm and hand, [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πούς

pous

a primary word; a "foot" (figuratively or literally):--foot(-stool).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πούς, ποδός, ὁ

n.m.

the foot

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πούς pous 93x

the foot, Mt. 4:6; 5:35; 7:6; 22:44; 28:9; Lk. 1:79; Acts 5:9; Rom. 3:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πούς a foot, Lat. pes, pedis, Hom., etc.; in pl., also, a bird's talons, Od.; the arms of a polypus, Hes.; ξύλινος π., of an artificial foot, Hdt.: phrases in respect to the footrace, περιγιγνόμεθ᾽ ἄλλων πόδεσσιν, to be better than others in running, Od.; ποσὶν ἐρίζειν to race on foot, Il.; ποσὶ νικᾶν, ἀέθλια ποσσὶν ἄροντο Hom.:—the dat. ποσί is added to all kinds of Verbs denoting motion, ποσὶ βῆναι, δραμεῖν, ὀρχεῖσθαι, etc.; for πόδα βαίνειν, v. βαίνω A. II. 3:—metaph., νόστιμον ναῦς ἐκίνησεν πόδα started on its homeward way, Eur.

as a mark of close proximity, πρόσθεν ποδός or ποδῶν, προπάροιθε ποδῶν just before one, Hom.; πὰρ ποδί close at hand, Pind.; but, παρά or πὰρ ποδός off-hand, at once, Theogn.:—so, παρὰ πόδα in a…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Bells worn on Isa 3:16,18

→ Washing of, as an example, by Jesus Joh 13:4-14

→ Sitting at De 33:3; Lu 10:39; Ac 22:3

→ See ABLUTION

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
91%feet
feet91% · 86×foot6% · 6×other renderings2% · 2×

94 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%object39%subject11%predicate3%second object3%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 93 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
παράπρόςκαίand, even, also,
δύο
DisjArticle the
αὐτός
δέωI bind
ἐπί
ἐγώ
βῆμαthe space covered by
οὐδέNeg
πούςfeet93×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὡςas, like as, how
σύ
σκανδαλίζωI cause to stumbεἰςἀποτινάσσωI shake off
Article the
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a meἸησοῦςJesusκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theχείρa handπροσκυνέωI worship
ἐγώ
εἰςὅτιthat, since, becμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπούς · 93× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Revelation Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Ephesians 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 153 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 163c. AD 40

11,22)—ἑρπετὸν δ’ ἐστὶν ἔχον ἀνωτέρω σκέλη τῶν ποδῶν, οἷς ἀπὸ γῆς πέφυκε πηδᾶν καὶ μετέωρον αἴρεσθαι καθάπερ τὸ τῶν ἀκρίδων γένος —·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.50c. AD 75–95

ἀφείλετο δὲ καὶ τὸν ὄφιν τὴν φωνὴν ὀργισθεὶς ἐπὶ τῇ κακοηθείᾳ τῇ πρὸς τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ ἰὸν ἐντίθησιν ὑπὸ τὴν γλῶτταν αὐτῷ πολέμιον ἀποδείξας ἀνθρώποις καὶ ὑποθέμενος κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς φέρειν τὰς πληγάς, ὡς ἐν ἐκείνῃ τοῦ τε κακοῦ τοῦ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 12.10c. AD 100

ἐπεὶ οὖν μέλλουσιν λέγειν, ὅτι Χριστὸς υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν, αὐτὸς προφητεύει Δαυείδ, φοβούμενος καὶ συνίων τὴν πλάνην τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν: Εἷπεν κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου: Κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Lond. 2 p. 203-204 no. 142Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 95

Σεμπρώνιος Γέμελλος στρατιώτης λεγιῶνος τρίτης Κυρηναικῆς κεντυρίας Πομπωνίου Σεουήρου ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα οὐλὴ ἀστραγάλωι ποδὸς ἀριστεροῦ Μικκάλωι Πτολεμαίου ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα πέντε οὐλὴ μετώπῳ μέσωι ὑπὸ τρίχα ἀπέχειν παρʼ

P.Fay. 155 descr.Bakchias (ArsinoitesAD 136

εως μητρὸς … … ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀρσινοιτῶν πόλεως ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ ἀστραγάλωι ποδὸς ἀριστεροῦ χρῆσιν ἔντοκον κεφαλαίου ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τεσσαράκοντα ὀκτὼ ἃς καὶ ἀποδώσει ἐν μηνὶ Φαῶφι

P.Fay. 200 descr.Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 173

Βακχιάδος Διόσκορος Ζωίλου τοῦ Ζωίλου μητρὸς Θερμούθεως … … … μονος τετ … … πους τοὺς

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
αὐτῆςautos of her G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · feminine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSF — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSF Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof her5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ἐπὶepi on G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

On

Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See HELIOPOLIS.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

pain; force; iniquity

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίon886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
τῆςho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
κεφαλῆςkephalē head G2776 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The head is the upper part of the body, but it can also mean a leader or a source, like Christ being the head of the church in 1 Corinthians 11:3. It's about control or authority.
Amplified meaning
the seat of authority, the source of wisdom
Tyndale gloss
head
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κεφαλή (kephalē) means 'head' and can refer to the literal head of a person or animal, as well as metaphorically to denote authority or superiority, such as in the context of a husband or Christ. It appears in various New Testament verses, including Matthew 5:36 and 1 Corinthians 11:3. The term also encompasses meanings related to the top or extremity of objects, like a corner-stone.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX nearly always for רֹאשׁ;]

the head: Mt 5:36, Mk 6:24, Re 1:14 9:7, al. mult.; fig., ἄνθρακες ἐπὶ τὴν κ., Ro 12:20(LXX); αἷμα, Ac 18:6; metaph., of a husband, c. gen., I Co 11:3, Eph 5:23; of Christ, I Co 11:3, Eph 4:15 5:23, Col 1:18 2:10, 19; of things, κ. γωνίας, Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κεφαλή, -ῆς, ἡ, Sept. for wN 1; the head, both of men: Mt. v. 36; Mk. vi. 24; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec.], 46; Jn. xiii. 9; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4; Rev. i. 14; iv. 4, and often; and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases κλίνειν THY κ-» ἐπαίρειν THY K., See κλίνω, 1 and ἐπαίρω; on the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under ἄνθραξ. Since the loss of the head destroys the life, κεφαλή is used in phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments: 80 in τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν k. ὑμῶν (see αἷμα, 2 a. p. 15°), Acts xviii. 6, and similar phrases in class. Grk.; see Passow 8. v. p. 1717*; Pape s. v.3; [L. and S.s. ν. 1. 3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent; of persons, master, lord: τινός, of a husband in relation to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3; Eph. v. 23; of Christ, the lord of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [ef. B. 124. 54. (109)]; of the church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κεφαλή. For the literal sense of κεφαλή it is sufficient to quote PSI V. 455" (A.D. 178) ἐφῖδον τοῦτον... ἔχοντα ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς τραύματα τρία, and P Lond 478 (ii/A.p.) (=I. p- 81) κεφαλὴν κομόωσαν ἐθείραις. Cf. also P Par 5741*28 (iii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘an invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one),” and the Christian amulet BGU III. 954° (vi/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 133) κλίνω τὴν κεφαλήν [μο]υ κα «τ: ἐνώπιόν σου. With Ac 18° we may compare BGU IV. 1024'"-17 (end of iv/A.D.) ἐκδέξι το[ίνυν] τὴην (Δ. τὴν) ἕως κεφ[αλῆ]ς τ[ι]Ἱμωρίαν, and to McNeile’s rendering of Mt 214 κεφαλὴν γωνίας, ‘‘the furthest extremity (not ‘the top’) of the corner,” a certain support is given by P Flor I. 508% (A.D. 268) ἐπ᾽ ἀπηλιωτικῆ[ς Ke]padis πρώτης μερίδος, apparently = ‘‘at the eastern extremity of the first division.’” In P Oxy II. 273!8…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κεφαλή (kephalē) — head.

κεφᾰλή, ἡ,

head of man or beast, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κεφαλῇ.. μείζονες taller in stature, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so μείων.. κεφαλήν[Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__a κατὰ κεφαλῆς, Epic dialect κὰκ κεφαλῆς, down over the head, κόνιν.. χεύατο κὰκ κεφαλῆς [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b κατὰ κεφαλήν, Epic dialect κὰκ κεφαλήν on the head, Ἐρύλαον.. βάλε πέτρῳ μέσσην κὰκ κεφαλήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Prose, from above, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: c.genitive, above, κ. κ. τινῶν γενέσθαι [Refs]; τὸ κ. κ. ὕδωρ, of rain water, [Refs 4th c.BC+] (-ῆς): in Architecture texts, upright, [Refs]; also, per head, each person (compare below 1.2), [LXX+4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κεφαλή

kephale

from the primary kapto (in the sense of seizing); the head (as the

part most readily taken hold of), literally or figuratively:--head.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κεφαλή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

the head

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κεφαλή kephalē 75x

the head, Mt. 5:36; 6:17; the head, top; κεφαλὴ γωνίας, the head of the corner, the chief corner-stone, Mt. 21:42; Lk. 20:17; met. the head, superior, chief, principal, one to whom others are subordinate, 1 Cor. 11:3; Eph. 1:22

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κεφαλή the head of man or beast, Hom., etc.; κατὰ κεφαλῆς, epic κὰκ κεφαλῆς, over the head, id. Hom.; κὰκ κεφαλήν on the head, Il.:— ἐς πόδας ἐκ κεφαλῆς from head to foot, id. Il.:— ἐπὶ κεφαλήν head foremost, head downwards, headlong, Hdt., Plat., etc.

the head, put for the whole person, Hom.; ἶσον ἐμῇ κεφαλῇ like myself, Il.; φίλη κ., Lat. carum caput, id. Il.: in bad sense, ὦ κακαὶ κεφαλαί Hdt.; ὦ μιαρὰ κ. Ar.

the head, i. e. the life, παρθέμενοι κεφαλάς setting their heads on the cast, Od.:—in imprecations, ἐς κεφαλὴν τρέποιτ᾽ ἐμοί on my head be it! Ar., etc.

generally, κ. σκορόδου a head of garlic, id. Ar.: the top or brim of a vessel, Theocr.: the coping of a wall, Xen.:—in pl. the head or source of a river…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hed (ro'-sh, Aramaic re'sh, and in special sense gulgoleth, literally, "skull," "cut-off head" (1Ch 10:10), whence Golgotha (Mt 27:33; Mr 15:22; Joh 19:17); mera'ashah, literally, "head-rest," "pillow," "bolster" (1Ki 19:6); qodhqodh, literally, crown of the head (De 28:35; 33:16,20; 2Sa 14:25; Isa 3:17; Jer 48:45); barzel, "the head of an axe" (De…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The uppermost and chief member of the body

Isa 1:6; 2Ki 6:31

- All the other members necessary to

1Co 12:21

- The body supported and supplied by

Eph 4:16

- Put for the whole person

Ge 49:26; Pr 10:6

- Put for the life

Da 1:10; 1Sa 28:2

- PARTS OF MENTIONED

. The skull

2Ki 9:35; Mt 27:33

. The crown

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%head
head75% · 57×heads22% · 17×chief3% · 2×

76 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object36%adverbial27%predicate27%subject9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίθρίξa hairφέρωI carry, bear, b
εἰς
γίνομαιI come into bein
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὄφιςa serpentμέγαςβλασφημίαabusive or scurr
εἰμίI am, exist
Χριστόςanointed, the Meἀνήρa male human bei
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
κεφαλήhead75×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,στέφανοςa crown, garlandἐπί
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἱμάτιονouter garmentεἷςone
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the Meπούςthe footγυνήa woman, wife, m
σύ
ὀμνύωI swear, take anπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
γωνίαa corner, a secret p
παρά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκεφαλή · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew 1 Corinthians Mark Luke Acts John Ephesians Colossians 1 Peter Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 196 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 100c. AD 40

δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι φιλόσοφοι τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦτον ἐξομοιοῦσι τῇ ἀμήτορι Νίκῃ καὶ Παρθένῳ, ἣν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ Διὸς κεφαλῆς ἀναφανῆναι λόγος ἔχει, οἱ δὲ Πυθαγόρειοι τῷ ἡγεμόνι τῶν συμπάντων·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.50c. AD 75–95

ἀφείλετο δὲ καὶ τὸν ὄφιν τὴν φωνὴν ὀργισθεὶς ἐπὶ τῇ κακοηθείᾳ τῇ πρὸς τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ ἰὸν ἐντίθησιν ὑπὸ τὴν γλῶτταν αὐτῷ πολέμιον ἀποδείξας ἀνθρώποις καὶ ὑποθέμενος κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς φέρειν τὰς πληγάς, ὡς ἐν ἐκείνῃ τοῦ τε κακοῦ τοῦ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.4c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν ὁ προφήτης: Λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
ZPE 156 (2006), p. 199-216Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 50

ἡμέρας ἐπὶ τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ποιήσω καθότι προγέγραπται. ἔγραψεν ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ Κεφαλᾶς Στοτοήτιος διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι αὐτὸν γράμματα. Στοτοῆτις Σαταβοῦτος μητρὸς Θαήσιος ἠγόρακα καθὼς πρόκειται.

P.Sijp. 26Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 51

Πτολεμαῖος Φίλωνος, ἀπὸ ὑπερετῶν Χαιρήμων Καλλιστράτου, γίνονται γ Νέου Σεβαστοῦ Νεμεσίων Πτολεμαίου, Πεβῶς Ἁρυώτου, Κεφάλων ὁμοίως, γίνονται γ, γίνονται η, τὸ ἥμισυ δ

P. Princ. 1 1Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 51

α ὀβολὸν Ἡρακλῆς ὁμοίως Λεύκου … ἡμιωβέλιον χαλκοῦς 2 α ὀβολὸν Ἰσχυρίων Πανετβύιος … Κεφάλων Πανετβύιος

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
αὐτῆςautos of her G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · feminine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSF — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSF Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof her5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
στέφανοςstephanos a crown G4735 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A crown is a wreath or garland given as a prize or symbol of honor, like the one worn by royalty or winners in public games, as seen in the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
a wreath, a symbol of honor
Tyndale gloss
crown
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

στέφανος, or stephanos, is derived from the verb meaning 'to encircle.' It refers to a crown or garland, typically awarded for victory in public games, but also symbolizes honor and glory. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to rewards for righteousness and eternal life, as seen in passages like James 1:12 and 2 Timothy 4:8. Some lexicons note a distinction between στέφανος as a victory crown and διάδημα as a royal crown, though this distinction may not always be strictly observed.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — στέφανος, διάδημα from a scan

We must not confound these words because our English ‘crown’ stands for them both. I greatly doubt whether anywhere in classical literature στέφανος is used of the kingly, or imperial, crown. It is the crown of victory in the games, of civic worth, of military valour, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness—woven of oak, of ivy, of parsley, of myrtle, of olive, or imitating in gold these leaves or others—of flowers, as of violets or roses (see Athenzeus, xv. 9-33); the ‘wreath,’ in fact, or the ‘ garland,’ the German ‘ Kranz’ as distinguished from ‘ Krone ;’ but never, any more than ‘corona’ in Latin, the emblem and sign of royalty. The διάδημα was this βασιλείας γνώρισμα, as Lucian calls it (Pisc. 35 ; cf. Xenophon, Cyr. vill. 3.13; Plutarch, De Frat. Am. 18); being properly a white linen band or fillet, ‘tenia’ or ‘ fascia’ (Curtius, iii. 8), encircling the brow; so that no language is…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

στέφανος, -ου, ὁ

(< στέφω, to encircle),

[in LXX chiefly for עֲטָרָה ;]

that which surrounds or encompasses (as a wall, a crowd: Hom., al.).

a crown, i.e. the wreath, garland or chaplet given as a prize for victory, as a festal ornament, or as a public honour for disting­uished service or personal worth (so to sovereigns, especially on the occasion of a παρουσία, q.v.; cf. Deiss., LAE, 372 ff.; on its use in LXX for the golden crown of royalty (prop., διάδημα, q.v., cf. Hort and Mayor on Ja 1:12): Mt 27:29, Mk 15:17, Jo 19:2, 5, I Co 9:25, Re 4:4, 10 6:2 9:7 12:1 14:14. Metaph.: Phl 4:1, Re 3:11; τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

στέφανος, -ov, 6, (στέφω [to put round; ef. Curtius § 224]), Sept. for Mwy, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the Sept. as 2S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek. xxi. 26; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet ef. 2 S.i. 10 Compl, Lag.), perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw. στέφανος and διάδημα (q.v-) was strictly observed in Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 2, 5; Rev. iv.4, 10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the material, ἀστέρων δώδεκα, Rev. xii.1; the wreath or garland which was given as a prize to victors in the public games [cf. BB. DD. 5. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, ef. 2 Tim. ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which will be given asa prize to the genuine servants of God and Christ: 6 τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος, the crown (wreath)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

στέφανος. From denoting a “ garland” or “‘ wreath” generally, στέφανος came to denote a ‘‘ crown of victory,’’ and as such was applied by Paul to his converts, as in 1 Thess 2.5. It should be noted, however, that the distinction between στέφανος, ‘“‘crown of victory” (*‘ Kranz”’) and διάδημα, “crown of royalty” (‘‘ Krone”) must not be pressed too far as by Trench Sy. § xxiii., for στέφανος is not infrequently used in the latter sense: see Mayor’s note on Jas 17%, and add from our sources the use of στέφανος to denote the “crown-tax ’” (aurum coronarium) for the present made to a king on his accession or other important occasion, e.g. P Petr 11. 39(e)it 33 (iii/B.c.) (as amended Wilcken Ostr. 1. p. 275) ἄλλου (sc. στεφάνου) παρουσίας, P Cairo Zen I. 59036 (B.C. 257) where 3000 drachmae are collected as © στέφανος τῶι βασιλεῖ, and P Fay 14° (B.C. 124) ot προκεχιρισμένοι πράκτορες τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

στέφανος (stephanos) — crown.

στέφᾰνος, ὁ,

(στέφω) that which surrounds or encompasses, πάντῃ γάρ σε περὶ σ. πολέμοιο δέδηεν the circling fight, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the wall round a town, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; καλλίπαις σ. circle of fair children, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. crown, wreath, chaplet, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δάφνας σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ῥόδινος, ῥοδόεις, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; σ. εἴρειν, πλέκειν, ἀνείρειν, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; θεῖσα ἀμφὶ βοστρύχοις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μύρα, στεφάνους ἑτοίμασον for a feast, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; hung at the door on festive occasions, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. b in plural, οἱ σ. the garland-market, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

στέφανος

stephanos

from an apparently primary stepho (to twine or wreathe); a chaplet (as

a badge of royalty, a prize in the public games or a symbol of honor

generally; but more conspicuous and elaborate than the simple fillet,

1238), literally or figuratively:--crown.

see GREEK for 1238

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

στέφανος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a crown, garland

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

στέφανος stephanos 18x

that which forms an encirclement; a crown, Mt. 27:29; Rev. 4:4, 10; wreath, conferred on a victor in the public games, 1 Cor. 9:25; met. a crown, reward, prize, 2 Tim. 4:8; Jas. 1:12; a crown, ornament, honor, glory

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

στέφανος στέφα^νος, ὁ, στέφω properly, that which surrounds, στ. πολέμοιο the circling crowd of fight, Il.; of the wall round a town, Pind.; καλλίπαις στ. a circle of fair children, Eur.

a crown, wreath, garland, chaplet, Hes., etc.: esp. at the public games, a crown of victory, Pind., Hdt., etc.:— these prize-crowns were mostly of leaves, of κότινος at the Olympic games, δάφνη at the Pythian, σέλινον at the Nemean, κισσός or πίτυς at the Isthmian.

generally, the meed of victory, the prize, victory, like Lat. palma, Soph.; στέφανον προτιθέναι to propose a prize, Thuc.

generally, a crown of glory, an honour, glory, Inscr. ap. Hdt.:— a crown as a badge of office or distinction, Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kroun: The word crown in the Old Testament is a translation of five different Hebrew words, and in the New Testament of two Greek words. These express the several meanings, and must be examined to ascertain the same.

1. In Hebrew:

The five Hebrew words are as follows:

(1) qodhqodh, from qadhadh;

(2) zer, from zarar;

(3) nezer, or nezer, both from nazar;

(4) aTarah, from `atar;

(5) kether, from kathar.

(1) Qodhqodh means "the crown of the head," and is also rendered in the King James Version "top of the head," "scalp," "pate." It comes from qadhadh, meaning "to shrivel up," "contract," or bend the body or neck through courtesy. Both the Revised Version (British and American) and the American Standard Revised Version, in De 28:35 and 33:16, translation it "crown" instead of "top" as in the King James Version. Jacob in his prophecy concerning…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Crown

(1.) Denotes the plate of gold in the front of the high priest’s mitre (Ex. 29:6; 39:30). The same Hebrew word so rendered (ne’zer) denotes the diadem worn by Saul in battle (2 Sam. 1:10), and also that which was used at the coronation of Joash (2 Kings 11:12).

(2.) The more general name in Hebrew for a crown is ’atarah, meaning a “circlet.” This is used of crowns and head ornaments of divers kinds, including royal crowns. Such was the crown taken from the king of Ammon by David (2 Sam. 12:30). The crown worn by the Assyrian kings was a high mitre, sometimes adorned with flowers. There are sculptures also representing the crowns worn by the early Egyptian and…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

This ornament, which is both ancient and universal, probably originated from the fillets used to prevent the hair from being dishevelled by the wind. Such fillets are still common; they gradually developed into turbans, which by the addition of ornamental or precious materials assumed the dignity of mitres or crowns. Both the ordinary priests and the high priest wore them. The crown was a symbol of royalty, and was worn by kings, (2 Chronicles 23:11) and also by queens. (Esther 2:17) The head-dress of bridegrooms, (Ezekiel 24:17; Isaiah 61:10) Bar. 5:2, and of women, (Isaiah 3:20) a head-dress of great splendor, (Isaiah 28:5) a wreath of flowers, (Proverbs 1:9; 4:9) denote…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

There are two distinct Hebrew terms rendered crown. The one represents such headdresses as we should designate coronet, band, miter, tiara, garland, etc. The other is generally applied to the headdresses of kings.

The former was a simple fillet or diadem around the head, variously ornamented. Newly-married persons of both sexes wore crowns on their wedding-day, So 3:11 Eze 16:12.

The crowns of kings were sometimes white fillets, bound round the forehead, the ends falling back on the neck; or were made of gold tissue, adorned with jewels. That of the Jewish high priest was a fillet, or diadem, tied with a ribbon of a hyacinth color, Ex 28:36 39:30. Occasionally the crown was of pure gold, and was worn by kings,

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.108c. AD 40

τὴν ὀφιομάχον οὖν γνώμην ἀντίταττε καὶ κάλλιστον ἀγῶνα τοῦτον διάθλησον καὶ σπούδασον στεφανωθῆναι κατὰ τῆς τοὺς ἄλλους ἅπαντας νικώσης ἡδονῆς καλὸν καὶ εὐκλεᾶ στέφανον, ὃν οὐδεμία πανήγυρις ἀνθρώπων ἐχορήγησεν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.148c. AD 75–95

ἐπῆν τε ἐσχάρα χρυσεία ὑπερανεστῶσα ἔχουσα κατὰ γωνίαν ἑκάστην στέφανον καὶ τοῦτον δʼ ἐκπεριοδεύοντα χρύσεον, ᾗ καὶ κρίκοι καὶ σκυταλίδες προσῆσαν, αἷς κατὰ τὰς ὁδοὺς ὑπὸ τῶν ἱερέων ἐφέρετο.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.2.1c. AD 140

Ἐκέλευσε δὲ ὁ ἄγγελος κυρίου στεφάνους ἐνεχθῆναι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 1st c. BC 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

τὸ θεοῖς μόνοις δ ταύτην τὴν τιμὴν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων δικαίως ἀπονέμεσθαι, καὶ τὸν χρυσοῦν στέφανον ἔπεμψά γε χαρισθήσεσθαι, μὴ βουλόμενος ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς ἡγεμονίας ἐπιβαρεῖν ὑμᾶς. ὅσα δὲ εἴχετε

P.Oxy. 71 4824OxyrhynchosAD 67

ἀπογραφόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης ὀμνύω Νέρωνα Κλαύδιον Καίσαρα Σεβαστὸν Γερμανικὸν Αὐτοκράτορα μηδὲν ἐψεῦσθαι. Στέφανος Σαραπίωνος τοῦ Τρύφωνος ὀμώμοκατὸν ὅρκον. … νις ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ. ἔτους ιγ Νέρωνος

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
ἀστέρωνastēr of stars G792 Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
24× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a literal star in the sky, like in Matthew 2:2, or a figurative star, as in Revelation 2:28 and 22:16, symbolizing Jesus or angels.
Amplified meaning
heavenly bodies, messengers of God
Tyndale gloss
star
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀστήρ (i.e., *astēr*) means 'star' and is derived from a root associated with brightness. It is used in both literal and metaphorical senses, appearing in various New Testament passages such as Matthew 2:2 and Revelation 1:16. The term can also symbolize angels, particularly in the context of the seven churches. Some sources note additional meanings like 'flame' or 'light.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀστήρ, -έρος, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for כּוֹכָב;]

a star: Mt 2:2, 7, 9, 10, Mk 13:25, I Co 15:41, Re 6:13 8:10, 11, 12 9:1 12:1, 4; metaph., ὁ ἀ. ὁ πρωϊνός Re 2:28 22:16; ἀ. πλαῆται, Ju 13; ἀ. ἑπτά, symbolizing the angels of the seven churches, Re 1:16, 20 2:1 3:1 (cf. ἄστρον, and v. DCG, ii, 674 f.; MM, s.v.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀστήρ, -έρος, ὁ, [fr. r. star (prob. as strewn over the sky), cf. ἄστρον, Lat. stella, Germ. Stern, Eng. star; F ick, Pt. i. 250; Curtius § 205; Vanicek p. 1146; fr. Hom. down]; a star: Mt. ii. 7, 9, 10 [ace. -έραν δὲ" C; see ἄρσην fin.]; xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25; 1 Co. xv. 41; Rev. vi. 13; viii. 10-12; ix. 1; xii. 1,4; ὁ ἀστὴρ αὐτοῦ, the star betokening his birth, Mt. ii. 2 (i. e. ‘the star of the Messiah,’ on which ef. Bertholdt, Christologia Judaeorum § 14; Anger, Der Stern der Weisen, in Niedner’s Zeitschr. f. ἃ. histor. Theol. for 1847, fase. 3; [B. D.s. v. Star of the Wise Men]); by the figure of the seven stars which Christ holds in his right hand, Rey. i. 16; ii. 1; iii. 1, are signified the angels of the seven churches, under the direction of Christ, ibid. i. 20; see what was said s. v. ἄγγελος, 2. ἀστὴρ 6 mpwivds the morning star, Rey. xxii. 16 [Rec. opOpwos]; ii. 28 (δώσω αὐτῷ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀστήρ. Syli 140" (late iv/B.C.), a list of payments on account of the temple at Delphi, has το[ῦ €]vA[C]vou ἀστέρος τοῦ παρδείγματος ““{π6 pattern of the wooden star’: see note. In OG/S 194 (i/B.c.) it is said of the Egyptian Amon Ra that ὥσπερ λαμπρὸς ἀστὴρ Kal δαίμων ἀγαθὸς τοῖς ἀπελπίἵουσι]ν ἐπέλαμψε. The use made of the same figure in the Apocalypse undoubtedly suggested the fourth century epitaph which Ramsay (Zee, p. 366) discovered on a stone now built into the wall of an early Turkish Khan in Lycaonia— Νεστόριος πρεσβύτερος ἐνθάδε kite ἀστὴρ ὃς ἐνέλαμπεν ἐν ἐκλησίεσιν θεοῦ.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀστήρ (astēr) — star.

ἀστήρ, ὁ,

genitive έρος: dative plural ἀστράσι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄστρασι [Refs 4th c.AD+]:—star (see. ἄστρον), ἀστέρ᾽ ὀπωρινῷ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. Ἀρκτοῦρος the chief star in the constellation, [Refs], etc.; shooting star or meteor, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. flame, light, fire, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. ἀστὴρ πέτρινος meteoric stone, [Refs]

II. metaphorically of illustrious persons, etc., φανερώτατον ἀστέρ᾽ Ἀθήνας[Refs 7th c.BC+]

III. star-fish, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

IV. name of a bird, perhaps goldfinch, [Refs]

V. blue daisy, Aster Amellus, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

VI. Samian clay used as sealing-wax, and in Medicine, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

VII. architectural ornament, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

VIII. bandage, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

VIII.2. name of various remedies, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀστήρ

aster

probably from the base of 4766; a star (as strown over the sky),

literally or figuratively:--star.

see GREEK for 4766

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀστήρ, έρος, ὁ

n.m.

a star

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀστήρ astēr 24x

a star, luminous body like a star, luminary, Mt. 2:2, 7, 9, 10; Rev. 1:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀστήρ The Root is ΣΤΕΡ, α being euphon. , cf. Lat. stella, i. e. sterula. dat. pl. = ἄστρασι not ἀστράσι a star, Il., etc.; cf. ἄστρον.

a flame, light, fire, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Stars

The eleven stars (Gen. 37:9); the seven (Amos 5:8); wandering (Jude 1:13); seen in the east at the birth of Christ, probably some luminous meteors miraculously formed for this specific purpose (Matt. 2:2-10); stars worshipped (Deut. 4:19; 2 Kings 17:16; 21:3; Jer. 19:13); spoken of symbolically (Num. 24:17; Rev. 1:16, 20; 12:1). (See ASTROLOGERS.)

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Created by God Ge 1:16; Job 26:13; Ps 8:3; 33:6; 136:7,9; Am 5:8

→ Differ in splendor 1Co 15:41

→ Worship of, forbidden De 4:19

→ Worshiped 2Ki 17:16; 21:3; 23:5; Jer 19:13; Am 5:26; Zep 1:5; Ac 7:42,43

→ Constellations of Isa 13:10

Thompson Chain Reference topics

general references to

Ge 1:16; Jud 5:20; Job 38:7; Ps 8:3; 147:4; 1Co 15:41; Re 22:16

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%stars
stars54% · 13×star42% · 10×from star4% · 1×

24 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject50%object33%predicate8%adverbial4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 24 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςτρίτος& Adv
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
φαίνωI shine, appear, see
Article the
δόξαhonor, renown, glory
ἄλλοςother, another,
ἀστήρa star
δόξαhonor, renown, g
ἀστήρof stars24×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaπρωϊνόςbelonging to theλαμπρόςshining, magnifi
ἐν
Article the
ὅς
ὁράωI see, look upon
χαίρωI rejoice, am glad
χαράjoy, gladness
πίπτωI fall, fall under
ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀστήρ · 24× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew 1 Corinthians Jude Mark
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 31c. AD 40

καὶ ἔστιν ὑπερουράνιος ἀστήρ, πηγὴ τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀστέρων, ἣν οὐκ ἂν ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καλέσειεν ἄν τις παναύγειαν, ἀφ’ ἧς ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πλάνητές τε καὶ ἀπλανεῖς ἀρύτονται, καθ’ ὅσον ἑκάστῳ δύναμις, τὰ πρέποντα φέγγη, τῆς ἀμιγοῦς καὶ καθαρᾶς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.13c. AD 75–95

τὸν ἥλιον γὰρ ἔδοξε τὴν σελήνην παραλαβόντα καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς ἀστέρας ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν κατελθεῖν καὶ προσκυνεῖν αὐτόν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 15.5c. AD 100

τοῦτο λέγει: ὅταν ἐλθὼν ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ καταργήσει τὸν καιρὸν τοῦ ἀνόμου καὶ κρινεῖ τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς καὶ ἀλλάξει τὸν ἥλιον καὶ τὴν σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἀστέρας, τότε καλῶς καταπαύσεται ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD undated

ἐμὸν δηλοῦν ἃ … τὰ γράμματα, ἀλλὰ ἕτερα … ἄχρι οὗ καὶ θεοὶ καὶ ἀστέρες … τὴν ἡμέραν καὶ κατατύχω … ροι τ … ς ἐγενομην πα… ου αχ

PSI 10 1162OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

οξεσιν … σφραγῖδες … σημειωσαι … υστηοπα … σερ … ι … … μʼ ἀστέρων … λε διαστητε … ν ἤμειβεν ον… ητε καὶ ενον … τροματηρ … ηκωσιν

CPR 1 233HermopolisAD 314

τυγχάνῳ μέλλουσα … ο γὰρ … τας ἐκεῖ ο … αστηρ … … ξην … διαλήμψεσθαι διὰ ἀποφάσεως οὕτως Ἀντώνιος Γρηγόριος ὁ διασημότατος ἡγούμενος Θηβαίδος

And a sign great appeared in <the> heaven: a woman having been clothed with the sun, and the moon under the feet of her and on the head of her a crown of stars twelve,
δώδεκα,dōdeka twelve, G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
Article theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve,75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
Article the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
Article theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate